Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Camera User Guide
● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.
● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
: Page before you clicked a link
● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
ENGLISH
© CANON INC. 2015
CEL-SW2PA210
1
Before Use
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information
Conventions in This Guide
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Numbers in parentheses indicate the numbers of corresponding
Camera Basics
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
]
Control ring (13) on front
Front dial (3) on front
● Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded
images or copyrighted music and images with music in the memory
card for anything other than private enjoyment. Refrain from
unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note that
even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright or
other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some
commercial settings.
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
]
]
]
]
]
Up button (11) on back
Left button (12) on back
Right button (17) on back
Down button (19) on back
Control dial (18) on back
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
● For information on camera warranty or Canon Customer Support,
please refer to the warranty information provided with your camera
User Manual Kit.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
●
●
: Important information you should know
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
: Indicates touch-screen operations
● Although the screen (monitor) and viewfinder are produced under
extremely high-precision manufacturing conditions and more than
99.99% of the pixels meet design specifications, in rare cases some
pixels may be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does
not indicate camera damage or affect recorded images.
=
xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
Accessories
● The symbols “ Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
Appendix
Index
3
Before Use
Part Names
( )
1
( )
2
( )
3
( )
9
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
( ) ( )( ) ( ) ( )
5
6
7
8
9
(
14
)
( )
10
(
(
10
)
(
(
)
)
)
)
)
15
16
)
5
11
( )
(
(
)
)
11
12
( )
4
(
12
)
(
17
(
18
(
19
Camera Basics
( )
3
(
13
(
14
)
)
Auto Mode /
( )
2
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
20
)
(
) (
15 16
)
( ) ( )
17 18
( )
4
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
( )
5
( )
1
( )
6
( )
7
(
13
)
( )
8
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
(1) Screen (monitor)*2
(2) Viewfinder
(12)
[
(Macro)] / [
/ Left button
(13) Indicator
(Manual focus)]
(1) Lens
(2) Lamp
(9) Hot shoe
(10) Diopter adjustment dial
(11) Mode dial
(3) ON/OFF button
(4) Remote switch terminal
(5) DIGITAL terminal
(6) HDMITM terminal
(3) Front dial
(14)
(15)
[
(Playback)] button
(4) Zoom lever
(12) Speaker
[
[
(AF frame selector)] /
Shooting:[
(telephoto)] /
(wide angle)]
(13) Control ring
(14) Microphone
(Story Highlights)] button
[
(16)
[
(Quick Set menu/Set)] button
(Flash)] / Right button
Playback:[ (magnify)] /
(7)
[
(Mobile Device Connection)]
(15)
(N-Mark)*1
[
(index)]
(17)
[
button
Accessories
(18) Control dial
(16) Tripod socket
(5) Strap mount
(8) Serial number (Body number)
(9) Movie button
(19)
[
(Information)] / Down
(17) Memory card/battery cover
(18) DC coupler terminal cover
(6) Exposure compensation dial
(7) Shutter button
(8) Flash
button
Appendix
(10)
[
] / [ (Single-image erase)]
(20)
[
] button
button
(11)
[
[
(One Shot/Servo)] /
(Drive mode)] / [ (Wi-Fi)] /
Index
Up button
z You can turn the control dial to perform
most of the operations possible with the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons, such as choosing
*2 Gestures may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector. In this
items and switching images.
4
Before Use
Table of Contents
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
5
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
6
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
7
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
8
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
9
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
10
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
11
Applying special effects
Vivid Colors
Before Use
Common Camera Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shoot
Poster Effect
“Aged” Photos
(
(
( 63)
● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
-
Camera Basics
● See several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined
settings (Creative Shot Mode)
Fish-Eye Effect
Miniature Effect
Toy Camera Effect
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
(
( 65)
-
● Shoot yourself under optimal settings (Self Portrait)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
-
Background Defocus
Soft Focus
Monochrome
(
(
( 66)
Shooting people well
● Focus on faces
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
-
● Without using the flash (Flash Off)
Portraits
-
(
● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
-
● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
Matching specific scenes
Night Scenes
-
Accessories
Starry Skies
Fireworks
(
(
( 60)
Appendix
Index
12
View
Save
Before Use
● View images (Playback Mode)
● Save images to a computer
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
-
-
Use Wi-Fi Functions
● Send images to a smartphone
● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
-
● On a TV
Camera Basics
-
-
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● On a computer
● Share images online
-
-
● Browse through images quickly
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Send images to a computer
-
-
● Erase images
-
● Create an album automatically
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
-
Record/View Movies
● Record movies
-
● View movies (Playback Mode)
-
Print
● Print pictures
Accessories
Appendix
-
Index
13
● Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects
inside.
This could result in electrical shock or fire.
Before Use
Safety Precautions
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.
● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions
described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.
● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.
● If your model has a viewfinder or interchangeable lens, do not look
through the viewfinder or lens at bright light sources (such as the sun
on a clear day, or a bright artificial light source).
Camera Basics
● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
This may damage your eyesight.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● If your model has an interchangeable lens, do not leave the lens (or
the camera with the lens attached) in the sun without the lens cap on.
This could result in a fire.
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
Warning
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
Exposure to the intense light produced by the flash could damage
eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants
when using the flash.
● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.
This could result in electrical shock or fire. Immediately stop using the
product and distance yourself from it.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a
child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
The hot shoe cover is dangerous if swallowed. If this occurs, contact a
doctor immediately.
● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct flame.
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in
electrical shock, fire, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into
contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately flush with water.
● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.
- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any
dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power
outlet, and the surrounding area.
● Use only recommended power sources.
Accessories
● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.
● Do not peel off the adhesive covering, if the battery pack has it.
● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
Appendix
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.
● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when
dropped.
Index
- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if
your product uses one.
This could result in electrical shock or fire.
● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
14
● Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
● When using optional lenses, lens filters, or filter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories firmly.
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your fingers with the lowering flash.
This could result in injury.
● Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended
periods.
Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature
burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot
places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
Caution
● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense artificial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Denotes the possibility of injury.
Caution
● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, do not push
the flash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
● Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the flash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the flash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
● When using the flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the flash.
Accessories
● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
Appendix
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions.
Index
- Humid or dusty places
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, fire, burns, or other injuries.
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, fire, burns, or
other injuries.
● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in fire.
● The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
15
● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or fire.
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
Camera Basics
This may cause the product to malfunction.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
16
Before Use
Touch-Screen Operations
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
The camera’s touch-screen panel enables intuitive operation simply by
touching or tapping the screen.
Touching
Camera Basics
Basic Guide
Touch the screen briefly with your
finger.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Basic Operations
z This gesture is used to shoot, configure
camera functions, and so on.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Basic information and instructions, from initial
preparations to shooting and playback
Dragging
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Touch the screen and move your finger
across it.
z This gesture is used in Playback mode
to switch to the next image, or to change
the magnified image area, among other
operations.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
17
Charging the Battery Pack
Before Use
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching the Strap
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Insert the battery pack.
1
( )
1
Camera Basics
z After aligning the
marks on the battery
Attach the strap adapter.
1
pack and charger, insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
( )
2
z Attach the included strap adapter to the
camera as shown.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
( )
2
z On the other side of the camera, attach
the adapter the same way.
( )
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Charge the battery pack.
2
( )
2
z CB-2LH: Flip out the plug (1) and plug
the charger into a power outlet (2).
( )
1
Attach the strap.
( )
5
2
z CB-2LHE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Attach the included strap to the camera
CB-2LH
( )
4
as shown.
( )
3
z On the other side of the camera, attach
the strap the same way.
( )
2
z The charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
( )
1
z When charging is finished, the lamp turns
green.
CB-2LHE
Holding the Camera
Remove the battery pack.
3
( )
1
Accessories
z After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
z Place the strap around your neck.
( )
2
z When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the flash, do not rest your fingers
on it.
Appendix
Index
●
●
To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
18
Insert the battery pack.
2
Before Use
●
●
●
●
For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
z Holding the battery pack with the terminals
in the position shown (1), hold the battery
lock toward (2) and insert the battery pack
toward (3) until the lock clicks shut.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
( )
1
( )
2
z If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always confirm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
( )
3
As a visual reminder of the charge status, attach the battery cover
Camera Basics
with
visible on a charged battery pack and concealed on an
uncharged one.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Check your card’s write-protect
switch and insert the memory card.
3
( )
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect switch when the
switch is in the locked position. Move the
switch toward (1).
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory
Card
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Insert the memory card with the label (2)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
( )
2
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted
in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera
z Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
(
Open the cover.
Close the cover.
1
4
( )
1
z Slide the switch (1) and open the cover
z Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
Accessories
( )
2
(2).
Appendix
( )
2
( )
1
Index
●
For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be
19
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation
Before Use
z You can adjust the angle and orientation
of the screen as needed, to suit shooting
conditions.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
z To protect the screen when the camera
is not in use, always keep it closed and
facing the camera body.
z The battery pack will pop up.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will
deactivate the viewfinder. Similarly, close the screen (facing the
camera body) to deactivate it and activate the viewfinder.
When including yourself in shots, you can view a mirror image
of yourself by rotating the screen around toward the front of the
Remove the memory card.
z Push the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z The memory card will pop up.
camera. To cancel reverse display, press the [
] button,
choose [Reverse Display] on the [ 1] tab, press the [ ] button,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Off].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Using the Screen
Setting the Date and Time
z Open the screen (1) and rotate it toward
the lens 180° (2).
( )
1
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
( )
2
z Close the screen in this orientation (3).
( )
3
Accessories
Turn the camera on.
1
●
The screen can only open to approximately 175° in direction (1).
Be careful not to open the screen any further than this, as it will
damage the camera.
z Press the ON/OFF button.
Appendix
z The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
Index
20
Set the date and time.
2
Changing the Date and Time
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item.
Adjust the date and time as follows.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to specify the date and time.
]
Access the menu screen.
1
z Press the [
] button.
z When finished, press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
Choose [Date/Time].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [ 2] tab.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Specify your home time zone.
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
[
] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
press the [ ] button.
Finish the setup process.
4
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ] button when finished.
After a confirmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
Change the date and time.
z To turn off the camera, press the ON/OFF
button.
3
z Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
z Press the [
menu screen.
] button to close the
●
●
●
Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
Accessories
●
●
Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the
camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the
battery pack is removed.
Appendix
To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC
Index
adapter kit (sold separately,
off.
●
Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
You can also set the date and time by touching the desired item
on the screen in step 2 and then touching [ ][ ], followed
by [
]. Similarly, you can also set your home time zone by
].
touching [ ][ ] on the screen in step 3, followed by [
21
Display Language
Before Use
Trying the Camera Out
Change the display language as needed.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
Enter Playback mode.
1
z Press the [
] button.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Camera Basics
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the setting screen.
2
z Press and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [
Turn the camera on.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
] button.
z Press the ON/OFF button.
z The startup screen is displayed.
Set the display language.
3
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Enter [
] mode.
2
z Set the mode dial to [
].
z Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
z Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
z Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
Accessories
z Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
●
●
The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
Appendix
pressing the [ ] button before you press the [
] button.
In this case, press the [ ] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
Compose the shot.
3
Index
You can also change the display language by pressing the
z To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
[
] button and choosing [Language
] on the [ 3] tab.
●
You can also set the display language by touching a language on
the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
22
Shoot.
4
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
Before Use
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
z Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
[
Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
( )
1
time (1).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Once recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
z If [Raise the flash] is displayed, lift the
flash with your fingers. It will fire when
shooting. If you prefer not to use the
flash, push it down with your finger, into
the camera.
2) Finish recording.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
2) Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down.
Accessories
z As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
Appendix
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
Index
z After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
23
Play movies.
3
Viewing
Before Use
z Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
] button again.
z Playback now begins, and after the movie
is finished, [ ] is displayed.
]
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
Enter Playback mode.
1
z Press the [
] button.
z To adjust the volume, press the [ ][
buttons during playback.
]
Camera Basics
z Your last shot is displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
Choose images.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
You can also start movie playback by touching [ ]. To adjust
the volume, quickly drag up or down across the screen during
playback.
[
] dial clockwise.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
z To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
Accessories
z To return to single-image display, press
the [ ] button.
Appendix
z Movies are identified by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
Index
24
Erasing Images
Before Use
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose an image to erase.
1
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an image.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Erase the image.
2
z Press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [
button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z The current image is now erased.
z To cancel erasure, press the [ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
]
●
●
●
You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
25
Before Use
On/Off
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting Mode
z Press the ON/OFF button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
z To turn the camera off, press the ON/OFF
button again.
Camera Basics
Advanced Guide
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
z Press the [
on and view your shots.
] button to turn the camera
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To turn the camera off, press the [
button again.
]
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your
camera, including shooting and playback options
●
●
To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [
button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is
retracted by pressing the [
] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
26
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
Before Use
Shutter Button
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of
inactivity.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
Camera Basics
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of
inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera
turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when
the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway
Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Power Saving in Playback Mode
Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to
shoot.)
The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of
inactivity.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
z The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
(
●
●
Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
Accessories
Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Appendix
Index
27
Before Use
Using the Viewfinder
●
Although the viewfinder is produced under extremely high-
precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the
pixels meet design specifications, in rare cases some pixels may
be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does not
indicate camera damage or affect recorded images.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting is easier with an electronic viewfinder, which helps you
concentrate on keeping subjects in focus.
●
●
displayed on the top and bottom or left and right edges of the
screen. These areas will not be recorded.
Switch between using the screen
and viewfinder as needed.
1
Camera Basics
The screen will not be activated when you move your eye away
z Moving the viewfinder near your eye will
activate its display and deactivate the
camera screen.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
tab ► [Display settings] ► [Display Control] ► [Manual] and then
[Manual display] ► [Viewfinder].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
Motion is displayed more smoothly (both on the viewfinder
z Moving the viewfinder away from your
eye will deactivate its display and activate
the camera screen.
and screen) in [
], [ ], [
], [
], or [ ] mode when
[Display priority] ► [Smooth]. At this time, setting [VF display] to
[Fast] makes motion on the viewfinder even smoother but may
make motion on the screen choppier.
Adjust the diopter.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Turn the dial to bring viewfinder images
●
Display will switch to the camera screen during Wi-Fi
into sharp focus.
●
●
and camera screen separately.
●
●
The viewfinder display and camera screen cannot be activated at
the same time.
tab ► [VF display format] ► [Display 2].
Touch operations on the camera screen are not possible while the
viewfinder display is in use.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
28
Before Use
Shooting Modes
Shooting Display Options
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
Press the [
level.
] button to show or hide the grid lines and electronic
( )
1
To configure the on-screen display in greater detail, access [ 1] tab ►
( )
3
Camera Basics
●
●
Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will
deactivate the viewfinder. Similarly, close the screen (facing
the camera body) to deactivate it and activate the viewfinder
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
( )
4
(
Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
( )
5
( )
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(1) P, Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Take a variety of shots using
(3) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(
(2) Movie Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
(4) Creative Shot Mode
See several effects applied to
You can also shoot movies when
the mode dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing the
movie button.
(5) Special Scene Mode
Shoot with settings designed for
specific scenes, or add a variety of
Accessories
Appendix
Index
29
Confirm your choice and exit.
4
Before Use
Using the Quick Set Menu
z Press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z The screen before you pressed the
Configure commonly used functions in the
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(Quick Set) menu.
[
] button in step 1 is displayed again,
(
showing the option you configured.
Access the
menu.
1
●
●
To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
Camera Basics
z Press the [ ] button.
You can also exit by choosing [ ] in the menu items and
pressing the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose a menu item.
2
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Configure
Settings
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
menu item (1).
z Available options (2) are shown at the
bottom of the screen.
z Touch [ ] in the upper right of the screen
to access the Quick Set menu.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Touch a menu item and then an option to
complete the setting.
( )
1
( )
2
z To return to the previous screen, touch
the [ ] menu item, or touch the selected
option again.
Choose an option.
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
or [ ] dial to choose an option.
z Items labeled with a [ ] icon can
be configured by pressing the [
button.
]
]
z You can access the screen for items
labeled with a [
].
z You can access the screen for items
labeled with a [ ] icon by touching
].
] icon by touching
[
Accessories
z Items labeled with a [
be configured by pressing the [
button.
] icon can
Appendix
]
[
z You can access the screen for items
labeled with a [ ] icon by touching [ ].
Index
z Items labeled with a [ ] icon can be
configured by pressing the [ ] button.
30
Choose a menu item.
3
Before Use
Using the Menu Screen
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Configure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows.
z For menu items with options not shown,
first press the [ ] button to switch
screens, and then either press the [ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the
menu item.
Access the menu screen.
1
]
z Press the [
] button.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z To return to the previous screen, press
the [
] button.
Choose a tab.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose an option.
4
z Tabs represent functions (1), such as
shooting ([ ]), playback ([ ]), or
settings ([ ]), or pages within each
function (2). Tabs are identified in this
manual by combining the function and
page, as in [ 1].
z When options are listed vertically, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose an option.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z When options are listed horizontally,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option.
]
z Move the zoom lever to choose the
function tab, and then press the [ ][
buttons or turn the [
the page tab.
]
Confirm your choice and exit.
] dial to choose
5
z Press the [ ] button to confirm your
choice and return to the menu item
selection screen.
z Press the [
screen displayed before you pressed the
] button in step 1.
] button to return to the
Accessories
[
Appendix
●
●
To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
Index
Available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or
31
Touch-Screen Operations
Before Use
On-Screen Keyboard
● To choose tabs, press the [
and then touch the desired function tab and page tab.
] button to access the menu screen,
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.
● Drag the menu items up or down to scroll them, or touch a menu item
to choose it.
Entering Characters
( )
1
● Touch an option to complete the setting and return to the menu item
selection screen.
Camera Basics
z Touch the characters to enter them.
● For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level, touch the
desired position on the bar.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z The amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
● To configure menu items for which options are not shown, first touch
the menu item to access the setting screen. On the setting screen,
either drag or touch to choose the item, and then touch to choose the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
option. To return to the previous screen, touch [
].
Moving the Cursor
● You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text fields)
to select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen
keyboard.
z Touch [ ][ ].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Entering Line Breaks
● When [
] is shown, you can touch [
] instead of pressing the
] instead of pressing the
] instead of pressing the
[
] button, if you prefer.
z Touch [ ].
● When [
[
] is shown, you can touch [
] button, if you prefer.
Switching Input Modes
● When [
] is shown, you can touch [
] button, if you prefer.
z To switch to numbers or symbols, touch
[
[
].
● To dismiss the menu, press the [
] button again.
z Touch [ ] to enter capital letters.
Accessories
z Available input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
Appendix
Deleting Characters
Index
z To delete the previous character, either
touch [
] or press the [ ] button.
z Touching and holding [
] will delete five
characters at a time.
32
Confirming Input and Returning to the
Previous Screen
Before Use
Indicator Display
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
depending on the camera status.
z Press the [
] button.
●
●
The on-screen keyboard is not available while the viewfinder
Indicator
Color
Camera Status
(
Status
Blinking
On
For some functions, [ ] is not displayed and cannot be used.
Camera Basics
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting
connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi, or display off
Green
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
Another way to use the keyboard is by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][
buttons or turning the [ ] dial to select characters or icons, and
then pressing the [ ] button. You can also move the cursor by
]
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Orange
Charging via USB
turning the [
] button.
] dial. To return to the previous screen, press the
[
●
When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
33
Before Use
Clock
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can check the current time.
z Press and hold the [ ] button.
z The current time appears.
z If you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch to
vertical display.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to change the display color.
]
z Press the [ ] button again to cancel the
clock display.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
When the camera is off, press and hold the [ ] button, then
press the ON/OFF button to display the clock.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
34
Before Use
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Camera Basics
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Auto Mode /
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
Hybrid Auto Mode
Turn the camera on.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the ON/OFF button.
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control
over shooting
z The startup screen is displayed.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Enter [
] mode.
2
z Set the mode dial to [
].
z Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
z Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in
Accessories
z Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Appendix
Index
35
Compose the shot.
3
2) Shoot.
Before Use
z To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom
bar (1) showing the zoom position is
displayed, along with the range of focus
(2).)
z Press the shutter button all the way down.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the flash, it fires
automatically.
( )
1
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
Camera Basics
z After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
( )
2
Shoot.
4
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
z
Press the movie button. The camera beeps
once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is
displayed with the elapsed time (1).
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
frames are displayed to indicate image
areas in focus.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
( )
1
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
z Several frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
z Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
z Once recording begins, take your finger
off the movie button.
Accessories
2) Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
z If [Raise the flash] is displayed, lift the
flash with your fingers. It will fire when
shooting. If you prefer not to use the
flash, push it down with your finger, into
the camera.
Appendix
z To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
Index
z When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
36
Shoot.
3) Finish recording.
3
Before Use
z Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
z Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
z Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
Camera Basics
●
The flash firing during shots indicates that the camera has
automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main
subject and background (Multi-area White Balance).
●
●
Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
] mode, because
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
operating the camera in other ways.
] mode, or
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
●
Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded
in digest movies.
Still Images
Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
●
Digest movie image quality is automatically set to [
Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
] for
Enter [ ] mode.
1
z Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following
(
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
] mode.
- The digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 16 minutes and 40
seconds.
Compose the shot.
2
Accessories
z Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
focus.
are changed.
Appendix
z For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
●
●
Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased.
Index
If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
[Digest Type] ► [No Stills].
●
37
Digest Movie Playback
Before Use
●
●
You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Movies
Still Images/Movies
Camera Basics
Before movie recording, lower the flash with your finger. During
recording, keep your fingers away from the microphone (1).
Leaving the flash raised, or blocking the microphone may prevent
audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound
muffled.
●
If the camera makes no operating sounds, it may have been
turned on while holding down the [ ] button. To activate
] button, choose [Mute] on the [ 3]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
sounds, press the [
tab, and then choose [Off].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
( )
1
Still Images
●
A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the
●
●
Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
recording movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant
camera shake. To record subjects at the same size shown before
●
●
To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit
when shooting in low-light conditions.
] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
A blinking [
Accessories
indicates that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or
release it and press it again.
Appendix
●
Audio is recorded in stereo.
●
●
No shutter sound is played when “Sleeping” and “Sleeping
Index
Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
38
● The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue,
and the background color of [ ] is orange.
Scene Icons
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
● For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range
Subjects icons are displayed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
In [ ] and [
] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
● In [ ] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.
● For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;
moving children; and other moving subjects.
Camera Basics
Background
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Subject
● Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving
Normal Backlit Dark*1 Sunsets Spotlights
[Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to [On] and scenes are automatically corrected
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2
3
2
3
2
3
3
2
3
2
3
3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
People
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
(
3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Moving People
Shadows on Face
Smiling
● Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people
when the flash is set to [ ].
–
● Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Sleeping
Babies
Smiling Babies
Sleeping Babies
Moving Children
Other Subjects
Other Moving Subjects
●
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot
with your expected effect, color, or brightness.
Accessories
–
–
–
–
–
Appendix
Other Close-Range
Subjects
2
3
*
*
Index
*1 Tripod used.
*2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
*3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
39
Continuous Shooting Scenes
Image Stabilization Icons
Before Use
If the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is
displayed when you shoot a still image, the camera shoots continuously. If
the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is displayed
when you press the shutter button halfway, one of the icons [ ], [ ], or
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions (Intelligent IS) is
automatically applied, and the following icons are displayed.
[
] is displayed to inform you that the camera shoots continuously.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Camera Basics
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Smiling
(including Babies)
Image stabilization for angular camera shake and shift-shake in
macro shots (Hybrid IS).
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
For movies, [
applied.
] is displayed and [ ] image stabilization is also
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF-assist beam and the flash will not fire, and
the shutter sound will not be played.
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when recording while walking (Dynamic)
Sleeping
(including Babies)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
recording movies at telephoto (Powered)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract
wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
Children
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow
subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera
shake.
●
●
In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first
shot.
Accessories
●
●
Appendix
this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
In [
] mode, no [
] icon is displayed.
●
When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ] button,
Index
and then select [
] dial).
] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[
40
On-Screen Frames
Before Use
Common, Convenient Features
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
In [
] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
Still Images
Movies
● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera
detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the
screen.
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 17x enlargement.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Move the zoom lever toward [ ].
1
z Hold the lever until zooming stops.
● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Zooming stops at the largest zoom factor
before the image becomes noticeably
grainy, which is then indicated on the
screen.
●
●
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
( )
1
Move the zoom lever toward [
again.
]
2
To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on the
screen. [ ] is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF mode
z The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
(
frame, and the camera will keep the subject in focus and image
brightness adjusted (Servo AF).
z (1) is the current zoom factor.
●
Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The zoom bar is color-coded to indicate the
zoom range.
Accessories
Appendix
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
Index
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear
grainy.
●
Because the blue range will not be available at some recording
achieved by following step 1.
41
Using the Self-Timer
Before Use
●
► [Digital Zoom] ► [Off].
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
Configure the setting.
Camera Basics
1
Shoot at common focal lengths in a range of 24 – 100 mm (35mm film
equivalent).
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z To change the focal length from 24 to
28 mm, turn the [ ] ring counterclockwise
until it clicks. Turn the [ ] ring
counterclockwise to zoom in or clockwise
to zoom out.
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
Step zoom is not available when recording movies even if you
turn the [ ] ring.
Shoot.
2
z For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
zoom factor by turning the [ ] ring counterclockwise. However,
you can set the focal length to 100 mm by turning it clockwise.
z For Movies: Press the movie button.
z Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
Accessories
z Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the flash fires.)
Appendix
Index
z To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
z To restore the original setting, choose [
]
in step 1.
42
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Before Use
●
For movies recorded using the self-timer, recording begins after
your specified delay time, but specifying the number of shots has
no effect.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
●
●
When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white
balance are determined by the first shot. More time is required
between shots when the flash fires or when you have specified
to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the
memory card becomes full.
z Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
Camera Basics
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Customizing the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
Shooting by Touching the Screen
(Touch Shutter)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
Still Images
Movies
Choose [ ].
1
With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply
touch the screen and release your finger to shoot. The camera will focus
on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically.
z Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
]
button.
Enable the touch-shutter function.
1
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [
] button, choose [Touch
Shutter] on the [ 2] tab, and then
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
delay time or number of shots.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a value, and then press the
] button twice.
]
Appendix
[
Index
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
z Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
43
Shoot.
2
Before Use
●
During continuous shooting, the focus, exposure, and colors are
locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the
shutter button halfway.
z Touch the subject on the screen, and
then lift your finger immediately.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
●
●
Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
z To cancel touch shutter, choose [Disable]
in step 1.
Camera Basics
●
●
●
As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
Shooting may slow down if the flash fires.
●
Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
shot by touching [ ].
these features are not available.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Continuous Shooting
●
●
while you touch the screen. Focus and exposure during
continuous shooting remain constant, after they are determined
for the first shot.
Still Images
] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
Movies
In [
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
In [
] mode, you can also choose items in step 1 by
Configure the setting.
1
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
]
Image Display during Playback
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group,
and only the first image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that
Accessories
the image is part of a group, [
screen.
] is displayed in the upper left of the
Appendix
●
Index
are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
Shoot.
2
z Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
44
Before Use
Using Face ID
●
●
●
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
the group.
Grouped images can be viewed individually when played
shooting. In [
] mode, the camera can detect babies and children
based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when
shooting.
This function also enables you to find shots you have taken that include
temporarily ungrouped.
Camera Basics
●
The following actions are not available for grouped images:
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
Personal Information
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
● Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with
Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved
on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected,
their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID
function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others,
and when posting images online where many others can view them.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,
Accessories
Appendix
Index
45
Registering Face ID Information
Before Use
z After [Register?] is displayed, press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
[
choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
]
You can register information (face info, names, and birthdays) for up to 12
people to use with Face ID.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z The [Edit Profile] screen is displayed.
Access the setting screen.
1
z Press the [
] button, choose [Face
Camera Basics
ID Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then
Register the person’s name and
birthday.
3
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
dial to choose [Add to Registry], and then
press the [ ] button.
z To register a birthday, on the [Edit Profile]
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add a New Face], and
then press the [ ] button.
]
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to specify the date.
]
z When finished, press the [ ] button.
Save the settings.
4
Register face information.
2
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [Save], and then press the
] button.
z After a message is displayed, press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
z Aim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
[
Appendix
[
z A white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
Index
choose [Yes], and then press the [
button.
]
z If the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
46
Continue registering face
information.
5
Before Use
●
●
●
Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured
image or scene differs drastically from the registered face
information.
z To register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected, overwrite
registered information with new face info. Registering face info right
before shooting will allow for easier detection of registered faces.
If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the
z Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot when
smiling, and shots inside and outside.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they
Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the
●
●
The flash will not fire when following step 2.
If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
] mode.
●
●
●
●
If you don’t want names to be recorded in images, choose [Face ID
Settings] on the [ 2] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose [Off].
You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if
In [ ] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen,
but they will be recorded in still images.
recorded in the same position as the first shot, even if subjects
move.
Shooting
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that
person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting.
Accessories
z
When you point the camera toward people,
the names of up to 3 registered people will
be displayed when they are detected.
Appendix
z Shoot.
z Displayed names will be recorded in still
images. The names of detected people
(maximum total of 5) will be recorded,
even if the names are not displayed.
Index
●
People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.
47
Checking and Editing Registered Information
Before Use
●
Even if you change names in [Edit Profile], the names recorded in
previously shot images will remain the same.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.
1
z Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
Edit Info].
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as
their faces change quickly as they grow.
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been
filled.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a person to check or edit
their information.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
1
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the person whose information you want
z Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
to check or edit, and then press the [
button.
]
Info].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Check or edit the information as
needed.
3
Choose a person to overwrite their
face info.
2
z To check a name or birthday, choose [Edit
Profile] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person whose face info
you want to overwrite, and then press the
[
] button. On the screen displayed,
you can edit the name or birthday as
described in step 3 of “Registering Face
[
] button.
z If five items of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the
Accessories
z To check face information, choose [Face
Info List] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
Appendix
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
[
] button. To erase face information,
then press the [ ] button.
press the [ ] button on the screen
displayed, choose face information to
Index
z If less than five items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
erase by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][
]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial, and then
press the [ ] button. After [Erase?] is
displayed, choose [OK] (either press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
48
Choose the face info to overwrite.
3
Erasing Registered Information
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the face info to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
You can erase information (face info, names, and birthdays) registered to
Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be
erased.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the [Erase Info] screen.
1
Register face information.
4
z Follow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Camera Basics
Info].
z Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
register the new face information.
z Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose a person to erase their
information.
2
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person to erase, and
then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filled.
Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
You can follow the above steps to register new face info when
there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite
any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, first erase
choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
]
●
●
If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
Accessories
Appendix
Index
49
Changing Image Quality
Before Use
Image Customization Features
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose from 4 levels of image quality. For guidelines on how many of
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Still Images
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
Movies
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Camera Basics
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
(
z Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [ ].
Guidelines for choosing image quality based on paper size
(for 3:2 images)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
For e-mailing and similar purposes
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Same aspect ratio as
35mm film, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes.
Used for display on standard-definition televisions or similar display
devices. Also used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series
sizes.
●
●
Not available in [
] mode.
Accessories
You can also change the image quality by accessing MENU
(
Square aspect ratio.
Appendix
Index
●
●
Not available in [
] mode.
► [ 1] tab ► [Still Image Aspect Ratio].
50
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from
Mercury Lamps
Changing Movie Image Quality
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Adjust movie image quality (image size and frame rate). The frame rate
indicates how many frames are recorded per second, which is determined
on the total recording time for movies at each level of image quality
In [
] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes
illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This
greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi-
area White Balance.
Camera Basics
z Press the [
] button, choose [Hg
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button, choose the movie
quality menu item, and then choose the
Lamp Corr.] on the [ 6] tab, and then
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
After you are finished shooting under mercury lamps, you should
set [Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not
caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.
For NTSC Video
Image Number of Recording
Quality Pixels
Frame Rate
Details
Accessories
●
●
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
1920 x 1080
59.94 fps
29.97 fps
For shooting in Full
Appendix
HD. [
] enables
1920 x 1080
movies with smoother
motion.
cannot be changed.
Index
1920 x 1080
1280 x 720
23.98 fps
29.97 fps
For shooting in HD.
For shooting in
standard definition.
640 x 480
29.97 fps
51
For PAL Video
Before Use
Helpful Shooting Features
Image Number of Recording
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Frame Rate
Details
Quality
Pixels
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level
1920 x 1080
50.00 fps
25.00 fps
25.00 fps
For shooting in Full
Still Images
Movies
HD.
1920 x 1080
1280 x 720
An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera
is level from front to back and left to right.
Camera Basics
For shooting in HD.
For shooting in
standard definition.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
640 x 480
25.00 fps
Display the electronic level.
1
z Press the [ ] button several times to
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
display the electronic level.
●
●
Black bars (displayed on the left and right in [
] and
],
[
[
[
] modes and on the top and bottom in [
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [
] modes) indicate image areas not recorded.
], and
Straighten the camera.
2
z (1) indicates the front-back orientation
and (2) the left-right orientation.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
► [ 8] tab ► [Movie Quality].
z If the camera is tilted, move it so that the
red line changes to green.
( )
1
( )
2
●
If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the
] button and check the setting in [ 1] tab ► [Shooting
[
Accessories
information display].
●
●
The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.
If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic
level will be updated automatically to match the camera
orientation.
Appendix
Index
●
●
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you
Not available in [ ] mode.
52
Magnifying the Area in Focus
Checking for Closed Eyes
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed
their eyes.
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will
enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame.
[
Configure the setting.
Configure the setting.
1
1
Camera Basics
z Press the [
] button, choose [AF-
z Press the [
] button, choose [Blink
Point Zoom] on the [ 3] tab, and then
Detection] on the [ 7] tab, and then
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shoot.
2
Check the focus.
2
z [ ] flashes when the camera detects a
person whose eyes are closed.
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
face detected as the main subject is now
magnified.
z To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
z To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
●
●
When you have specified multiple shots in [ ] mode, this
function is only available for the final shot.
Accessories
●
●
The area in focus is not magnified in the following cases when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when
you have selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display
- If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the
camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the
camera detects subject movement
Appendix
●
●
This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [
]
Index
This feature is not available in continuous shooting mode
Not available in [ ] mode.
(
53
Deactivating Auto Level
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Deactivating Image Stabilization
Normally, auto leveling keeps movies straight. To cancel this feature,
choose [Disable].
Still Images
Movies
z Press the [
[
] button, choose
Auto level] on the [ 4] tab, and then
When the camera is held still (as when shooting from a tripod), you should
set image stabilization to [Off] to deactivate it.
Camera Basics
z Choose [Disable], and press the [
]
Access the setting screen.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [
] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
Once recording begins, the display area narrows, and subjects
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[
[
] dial to choose [IS Mode], press the
] button, and then press the [ ][
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is
Continuous
Off
Deactivates image stabilization.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
54
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same
Size Shown before Shooting
Before Use
Customizing Camera Operation
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as
follows.
Still Images
Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for image straightening and correction
of significant camera shake.
To record movies with subjects at the same size shown before shooting,
you can reduce image stabilization and cancel Auto Level.
Camera Basics
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
z Set [ Auto level] to [Disable] as
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus
when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [
] button, choose [AF-
assist Beam] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose [Off].
Settings] screen.
z Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
●
You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
[Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off]
(
Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [
(NTSC) or [ ] (PAL).
]
Accessories
Appendix
Index
55
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from
Lighting Up
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
displayed immediately after shooting.
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce
red-eye when the flash is used in low-light shots.
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
Camera Basics
Access the [Flash Control] screen.
1
z Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Access the [Review image after
shooting] screen.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [
[Review image after shooting] on the
2] tab, and then press the [ ] button.
] button, choose
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Configure the setting.
2
[
z Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
choose [Off].
Configure the setting.
2
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
z Choose [Display Time], and then choose
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
the desired option.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Quick].
Quick
Displays images only until you can shoot again.
Displays images for the specified time. Even while
the shot is displayed, you can take another shot by
pressing the shutter button halfway again.
2 sec., 4 sec.,
8 sec.
Accessories
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
Hold
Off
Appendix
No image display after shots.
Index
56
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots
Before Use
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],
1
Configure the setting.
2
Camera Basics
z Choose [Display Info], and then choose
the desired option.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Off
Displays only the image.
Detailed
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
Info] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.
By pressing the [
] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the
settings of [Display Info] are not changed. You can also erase
images by pressing the [ ] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
57
Before Use
Applying Effects Automatically
(Creative Shot)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot
Camera Basics
The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically
applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the
subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture
multiple still images with effects using camera-determined settings.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Enter [ ] mode.
1
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and
take shots enhanced with unique image effects or
captured using special functions
z Set the mode dial to [
].
Shoot.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the shutter button all the way
down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is
played three times.
z After the six images are displayed
in succession, they are displayed
simultaneously for about two seconds.
z To keep the images displayed until you
press the shutter button halfway, press
the [ ] button. You can choose an image
for full-screen display by pressing the
Accessories
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the [
dial, and then press the [ ] button.
z To return to the original display, press the
] button.
]
Appendix
Index
[
●
Shooting will take some time when the flash fires, but hold the
camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times.
●
●
Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only
available immediately after you shoot.
58
Choosing Effects
Recording Movies with a Variety of Effects
Before Use
You can choose effects for images captured in [
] mode.
Let the camera determine subjects and shooting conditions when you
record movies, and filters and effects such as playback in slow or fast
motion will be added automatically. Once you have recorded a few
movies, up to four are automatically combined to create a Creative Shot
movie of 15 – 25 seconds. Note that sound is not recorded in this mode.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z After choosing [
ring to choose the effect.
] mode, turn the [
]
Camera Basics
Enter [ ] mode.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
Auto
All effects
Record the first movie.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Retro
z Press the movie button. Recording
begins, and a bar is displayed to indicate
the elapsed time.
Images resemble old photos
Monochrome
Special
Natural
Images are generated in one color
Bold, distinctive-looking images
Subdued, natural-looking images
z Recording stops automatically in 3 – 6
seconds.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Record the second to fourth movies.
3
z Repeat step 2 three times to record four
movies.
●
Even if you do not record four movies that day, a Creative Shot
movie will be saved as a separate file once the date changes.
Accessories
●
●
Effects are generally applied consistently to movies 1 – 4, but you
Appendix
Index
Creative Shot Movie Playback
You can choose and play back Creative Shot movies recorded in [
]
59
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Before Use
Specific Scenes
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically configure the settings for optimal shots.
z Vivid shots of fireworks.
Enter [
] mode.
1
z Set the mode dial to [
].
Camera Basics
●
●
Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
In [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
●
●
●
Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
Choose a shooting mode.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
In [ ] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. In this case,
(
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shoot.
3
●
●
●
When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [
]
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(
z Take shots of people with a softening
effect.
In [ ] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
Accessories
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld Night Scene)
Appendix
Still Images
Movies
Index
z Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
z A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
60
Shooting Yourself under Optimal Settings
(Self Portrait)
Before Use
Applying Special Effects
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
For self-portraits, customizable image processing includes skin smoothing
as well as brightness and background adjustment to make yourself stand
out.
Shooting in Vivid Colors
(Super Vivid)
Still Images
Movies
Choose [ ].
Camera Basics
1
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
z Shots in rich, vivid colors.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
Open the screen.
2
Posterized Shots (Poster Effect)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
( )
2
z Open the screen as shown.
Still Images
Movies
( )
1
z Shots that resemble an old poster or
illustration.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Configure the setting.
3
z On the screen, touch the icon of the
setting to configure.
●
●
In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots first, to make
sure you obtain the desired results.
You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
z Choose the desired option.
(
z To return to the previous screen, touch
Accessories
[
].
Appendix
Index
Shoot.
4
61
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)
Before Use
Item
Details
Choose from [
defocusing.
] or one of six levels of background
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Choose from five levels of brightness.
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-
out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in high-
contrast shots.
Choose from five levels of skin smoothing. Skin smoothing
is optimized for the main subject’s face.
Camera Basics
To use touch shutter, choose [ ].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose [ ].
1
●
Areas other than people’s skin may be modified, depending on
the shooting conditions.
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
●
Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Shoot.
2
z Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
In [ ] flash mode, background defocusing is set to [
cannot be changed.
] and
In [ ] mode, the time left before shooting is shown on the top of
the screen when you activate the self-timer by selecting [ ], or
by selecting [ ] and setting the time to 3 seconds or more.
●
●
Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
Accessories
If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount
the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod
Appendix
●
●
Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes and combines the images.
Index
●
[
] may be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway
in bright conditions, indicating automatic adjustment for optimal
image brightness.
62
Adding Artistic Effects
Before Use
●
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
(
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an effect.
●
●
Colors will look faded on the shooting screen, but the image aging
effect is not shown. Review the image in Playback mode to see
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Camera Basics
The image aging effect is not shown in movies.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Natural
Images are natural and organic.
Art Standard
Art Vivid
Art Bold
Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Images resemble vivid illustrations.
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
Still Images
Movies
Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and
dark ambiance.
Art Embossed
Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose [ ].
1
Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
Still Images
Movies
Choose an effect level.
2
This effect makes colors look faded and images look weathered, as in old
photographs. Choose from five effect levels.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
Choose [ ].
1
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Accessories
(
Shoot.
3
Appendix
Choose an effect level.
2
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
●
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Index
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Shoot.
3
63
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Speed
Playback Time
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Movies are played back at 30 fps.
Choose [ ].
1
●
●
The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
z A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose the area to keep in focus.
2
●
●
To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][
buttons in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation,
press the [ ][ ] buttons.
]
z Press the [ ] button.
z Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and turn the [ ] dial to move it.
To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation, press the
[
][ ] buttons, and to move the frame when it is in vertical
orientation, press the [ ][ ] buttons.
Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
●
●
For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
3
Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [
] and [ ] at
Accessories
an aspect ratio of [
be changed.
z Turn the [
] dial to choose the speed.
Appendix
Index
●
You can also move the frame by touching or dragging across the
screen.
Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
4
z Press the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
64
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
Making Subjects Stand Out
(Background Defocus)
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
You can shoot subjects so that they stand out from the background.
Two consecutive images are captured with settings optimized for
background defocus. The background is defocused through lens effects
and subject- and scene-based image processing.
Camera Basics
Choose [ ].
1
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose [ ].
1
(
].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Choose a color tone.
(
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose a color tone.
Shoot.
2
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
z Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
Two consecutive images are captured
when you press the shutter button all the
way down.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shoot.
3
z A blinking [ ] icon indicates that the
images could not be processed.
Standard
Warm
Shots resemble toy camera images.
Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
●
●
Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
Cool
●
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Accessories
For the best results with background defocusing, try shooting
close to the subject, and ensure ample distance between the
subject and background.
Appendix
●
●
There may be a delay after shooting before you can shoot again.
To adjust the effect level, turn the [ ] ring.
Index
65
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
Shooting in Monochrome
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.
Choose [ ].
1
Choose [ ].
1
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Camera Basics
(
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a color tone.
2
Choose an effect level.
2
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose a color tone.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Shoot.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shoot.
3
B/W
Black and white shots.
Sepia
Blue
Sepia tone shots.
●
Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Blue and white shots.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
66
Shoot.
4
Before Use
Special Modes for Other Purposes
z Press the shutter button. The flash fires
as the camera takes the first shot.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z The second and third shots are now
taken, without firing the flash.
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)
Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait)
Have the person stay still until the
lamp blinks.
5
Camera Basics
Still Images
Movies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z The person you are shooting should stay
still until the lamp blinks three times after
the third shot, which may take up to about
two seconds.
Capture beautiful shots of people against starry skies. After initially firing
the flash to capture the person, the camera shoots twice without flash.
The three images are combined into a single image and processed to
make the stars more prominent.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z All the shots are combined to create a
single image.
Choose [ ].
1
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
●
●
●
●
Under some shooting conditions, images may not look as
expected.
[
] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
For better shots, have the person stand away from illumination
such as street lights, and make sure the flash is raised.
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
Raise the flash.
Accessories
2
To avoid blurry shots, make sure the person you shoot in
steps 4 – 5 stays still.
z Lift the flash with your fingers.
Appendix
Secure the camera.
3
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
Index
other measures to keep it still.
67
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies
(Star Nightscape)
Before Use
●
●
●
For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
To adjust subject brightness, try changing the flash exposure
Still Images
Movies
Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in
the image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful.
To adjust background brightness, try changing the exposure
expected under some shooting conditions, and the person should
stay still in steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 15 seconds.
To capture more stars and brighter starlight, choose MENU
Choose [ ].
1
Camera Basics
●
●
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
► [Prominent]. However, images may not look as expected under
some shooting conditions, and the person should stay still in
steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 8 seconds.
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
] button.
[Star Emphasis] ► [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Secure the camera.
2
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still and
prevent camera shake.
Shoot.
3
Accessories
Appendix
●
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
Index
68
Secure the camera.
3
Before Use
●
●
For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[Star Emphasis] ► [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].
Shoot.
4
z Press the shutter button all the way
down. [Busy] is displayed briefly, and
then shooting begins.
Camera Basics
●
specify the focal position before shooting.
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z To cancel shooting, press the shutter
button all the way down again. Note
that cancellation may take up to about
30 seconds.
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Still Images
Movies
Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in
a single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots,
the camera shoots continuously. A shooting session can last up to about
two hours. Check the battery level in advance.
●
●
If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a
composite image created from the images up to that point is
saved.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
Choose [ ].
1
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
(
●
●
For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
specify the focal position before shooting.
[
] button.
Accessories
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
Appendix
Specify the duration of the shooting
session.
2
Index
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose the shooting
duration.
69
Check the brightness.
4
Shooting Movies of Star Movement
(Star Time-Lapse Movie)
Before Use
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot a single still image.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
check image brightness.
By recording a time-lapse movie that combines images shot at a specified
interval, you can create movies with fast-moving stars. You can adjust the
shooting interval and recording duration as needed.
Note that each session takes a long time, and requires many shots. Check
the battery level and memory card space in advance.
z To adjust brightness, turn the exposure
compensation dial and change the
exposure level on the shooting screen.
Check brightness again by taking another
shot.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose [ ].
1
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes”
Shoot.
5
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
z Press the movie button. [Busy] is
displayed briefly, and then shooting
begins.
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
]
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
[
] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z To cancel shooting, press the movie
button again. Note that cancellation may
take up to about 30 seconds.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
Configure movie settings.
z The camera operates in Eco mode
2
(
z Press the [ ] button.
Item
Effect
Options
Details
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an item, and then choose
the desired option.
]
Choose movie effects,
such as star trails.
Accessories
15 sec., 30 sec.,
1 min.
Choose the interval
between each shot.
Secure the camera.
Shot Interval
Frame Rate
3
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
Appendix
,
,
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Choose the movie frame
rate.
Index
Choose the length of
the recording session.
To record until the
battery runs out, choose
[Unlimited].
60 min., 90 min.,
120 min., Unlimited
Shooting Time
70
Estimated playback time based on shooting interval and frame rate (for a
one-hour session)
Before Use
●
●
Sound is not recorded.
For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night
Frame Rate
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Interval between Shots
Playback Time
16 sec.
NTSC
PAL
●
●
You can also access the screen in step 2 by choosing MENU
(
15 sec.
15 sec.
30 sec.
30 sec.
1 min.
To save each shot collected before the movie is created, choose
Stills] ► [On]. Note
8 sec.
8 sec.
4 sec.
4 sec.
2 sec.
Camera Basics
that these individual images are managed as a single group, and
during playback, only the first image is displayed. To indicate that
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
the image is part of a group, [
] is displayed in the upper left
in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
1 min.
specify the focal position before shooting.
Even if you specify [Unlimited] in [Shooting Time] in step 2 and
use an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
stop after about 8 hours, at most.
●
●
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space,
shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that
point is saved.
●
A shooting interval of [1 min.] is not available with these effects:
[
], [ ], [ ], or [ ].
Accessories
Appendix
Index
71
Adjusting Colors
Adjusting the Focus
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Colors can be manually adjusted in [ ] mode.
Automatically adjust the focus to suit starry skies.
Choose a shooting mode.
Choose a shooting mode.
1
1
[
[
Camera Basics
Choose color adjustment.
Secure the camera.
2
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
[
other measures to keep it still.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Adjust the setting.
Frame the stars to capture.
3
3
z Turn the [
] dial or press the [ ][
]
z Press the [ ] button.
buttons to adjust the correction level for B
and A, and then press the [ ] button.
z Tilt the camera so that the stars to
capture are inside the frame displayed.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
●
●
●
B represents blue and A, amber.
Skin tones remain the same when you adjust colors in [ ] mode.
Advanced settings can be accessed by pressing the [
]
Adjust the focus.
4
Accessories
z Press the [ ] button. [Adjusting star
focus] is displayed, and adjustment
begins.
●
You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 2.
Appendix
z Adjustment may take about 30
seconds. Do not move the camera until
[Adjustment completed] is displayed.
Index
z Press the [ ] button.
5
72
Before Use
Recording Various Movies
●
●
The focus may not be adjusted under the following conditions. In
this case, try again from step 3.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
- There is a bright light source
- Airplanes or other light sources or clouds crossed the sky
Recording Movies in [ ] Mode
Still Images
Movies
If adjustment fails, focus returns to the original position.
Camera Basics
Enter [ ] mode.
1
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Configure the settings to suit the
2
Shoot.
3
z Press the movie button.
z To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
Accessories
●
●
You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(
Appendix
Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [ ] and
Index
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons while [ ] is displayed.
73
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Recording
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in 1/3-
stop increments within a range of −3 to +3 stops.
Auto Slow Shutter can be disabled if movement in movies is rough.
However, under low light, movies may look dark.
z Press the [
Auto slow shutter] on the [ 7]
tab, and then choose [A-SLOW OFF]
] button, choose
Lock the exposure.
1
[
z Touch [ ] to lock the exposure.
Camera Basics
(
z To unlock the exposure, touch [ ] again.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [A-SLOW ON].
Adjust the exposure.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Turn the exposure compensation dial.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
Auto Slow Shutter is only available for [
movies.
] and [
]
Accessories
Appendix
Index
74
Using the Attenuator
Correcting Severe Camera Shake
Before Use
The attenuator can reduce audio distortion in noisy environments.
However, in quiet environments, it lowers the sound-recording level.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Counteract severe camera shake, such as when recording while moving.
The portion of images displayed changes more than for [Standard], and
subjects are further enlarged.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Attenuator] on the [ 7] tab, and then
z Follow the steps in “Recording Movies
with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
Camera Basics
[High].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Recording Short Clips
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Still Images
Movies
●
●
[Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off].
Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [
Apply playback effects to brief clips of a few seconds, such as fast motion,
slow motion, or replay. Clips recorded in this mode may be included in
]
(NTSC) or [
] (PAL).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Enter [ ] mode.
1
Sound Settings
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
Still Images
Movies
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
z Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
Deactivating the Wind Filter
Noise caused by strong wind can be reduced. However, the recording
may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind. In
this case, you can deactivate the wind filter.
Accessories
Specify the shooting time and
playback effect.
2
Appendix
z Press the [
] button, choose [Wind
Filter] on the [ 7] tab, and then press
z Press the [ ] button.
[
Index
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the shooting time
(4 – 6 sec.), and turn the [
] dial to set
3
z A bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed.
75
Playback Effects
Before Use
2x
Playback in fast motion
Playback at normal speed
Playback in slow motion
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1x
1/2x
Normal playback with the last two seconds rewound and
played again in slow motion
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
Sound is not recorded in these clips.
The movie quality is [ ] (for NTSC) or [
] recording, a mark indicating the last two seconds is
added to the bar showing the elapsed time.
] (for PAL)
During [
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
●
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Recording iFrame Movies
Still Images
Movies
Record movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or
devices.
Choose [ ].
1
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Accessories
z Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
Appendix
Index
2
●
●
iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc.
The movie quality is [ ] (for NTSC) or [
] (for PAL)
(
76
Before Use
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
Enter [ ] mode.
1
Camera Basics
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Customize the settings as desired
2
P Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting
style
●
●
If the optimum exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
(
which may enable optimum exposure.
Movies can be recorded in [ ] mode as well, by pressing the
movie button. However, some
(
recording.
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode
dial set to [ ] mode.
● [ ]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
Accessories
● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes
other than [ ], make sure the function is available in that mode
Appendix
(
Index
77
Before Use
Image Brightness (Exposure)
●
●
AE: Auto Exposure
After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [
(Program Shift).
] dial
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
Still Images
Movies
Changing the Metering Method
Camera Basics
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of -3 to +3.
Still Images
Movies
Auto Mode /
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
Hybrid Auto Mode
z As you watch the screen, turn the
exposure compensation dial to adjust
brightness.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure
(AE Lock)
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the
shooting conditions.
Evaluative
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
Center
Weighted
Avg.
Determines the average brightness of light across
the entire image area, calculated by treating
brightness in the central area as more important.
Lock the exposure.
1
Accessories
Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE Point
frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to
z Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then press
the [ ] button.
Spot
Appendix
z [ ] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
Index
z To unlock AE, press the [ ] button again.
[
] is no longer displayed.
Compose the shot and shoot.
2
78
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
Changing the ISO Speed
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Set the ISO speed to [AUTO] for automatic adjustment to suit the shooting
mode and conditions. Otherwise, set a higher ISO speed for higher
sensitivity, or a lower value for lower sensitivity.
Set the metering method to [ ].
1
].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
[
Camera Basics
(
Configure the setting.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Spot
AE Point] on the [ 6] tab, and then
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z The Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement of the AF frame
●
●
To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
(
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
●
The faster shutter speed used at higher ISO speeds reduces
subject and camera shake and increases the flash range.
However, shots may look grainy.
[
5] tab ► [ISO speed] ► [ISO Speed].
Accessories
Appendix
Index
79
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specified
in a range of [400] – [12800], and sensitivity can be specified in a range of
three levels.
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each
time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and
overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-
stop increments.
Access the setting screen.
1
Camera Basics
z Press the [
] button, choose [ISO
Choose [ ].
speed] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [
] button, choose
z Choose [ISO Auto Settings] and press the
[Bracketing] on the [ 4] tab, and then
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
] button.
Configure the setting.
2
z Choose a menu item to configure, and
Configure the setting.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [ ] dial.
Changing the Noise Reduction Level
(High ISO NR)
●
●
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
Accessories
z Press the [
ISO NR] on the [ 6] tab, and then
] button, choose [High
●
●
Appendix
specified for that function is treated as the standard exposure
level for this function.
You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing
Index
the [
] button when the exposure compensation screen
Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [
(
●
●
]
(
●
Not available when images are captured in RAW format
for the final shot.
(
80
Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction)
Shadow Correct
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Automatically preserve image detail in shadows as follows.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Tone down bright image areas, which might otherwise look washed out,
as follows.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
(
Camera Basics
displayed.
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Adjusting Auto ND Filter Settings
Available ISO Speed
Options
Details
(
For optimal brightness in the scenes you shoot, Auto ND filter reduces
light intensity to 1/8 the actual level, by an amount equivalent to three
stops. Choosing [ ] enables you to reduce the shutter speed and
aperture value.
–
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Automatic adjustment to prevent
washed-out highlights
[AUTO], [125] – [12800]
[AUTO], [250] – [6400]
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Tone down highlights by about
200% relative to the brightness level
of [ ].
(
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
●
supported range if you have specified a value outside the
supported range indicated here.
Accessories
●
●
When selecting [ ], mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. In this case,
Appendix
Index
ND: Neutral Density
81
Custom White Balance
Before Use
Image Colors
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)
Still Images
Movies
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
choose [ ] or [ ].
Camera Basics
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Aim the camera at a plain white subject,
so that the entire screen is white. Press
the [ ] button.
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
z The tint of the screen changes once the
white balance data has been recorded.
●
Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
recording white balance data.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
the shooting conditions.
Auto
Day Light
Shade
For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
For shooting in the shade.
Manually Correcting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
Cloudy
For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
You can correct white balance. This adjustment can match the effect of
using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or color-
compensating filter.
For shooting under ordinary incandescent
lighting.
Tungsten
Fluorescent
For shooting under white fluorescent lighting.
Accessories
Configure the setting.
1
Fluorescent H For shooting under daylight fluorescent lighting.
choose [ ].
Appendix
Flash
For shooting with the flash.
For manually setting a custom white balance
Index
Custom
z Turn the [
] dial to adjust the
(
correction level for B and A.
82
Configure advanced settings.
2
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Before Use
z To configure more advanced settings,
press the [ ] button and adjust
the correction level by turning the
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
or black and white.
[
[
][ ] dials or pressing the
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
z To reset the correction level, press the
] button.
menu, and choose the desired option
Camera Basics
[
(
z Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
–
My Colors Off
Vivid
●
The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if
you switch to another white balance option (by following steps
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation,
making images sharper.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Tones down contrast and color saturation for
subdued images.
correction levels will be reset if you record custom white balance
data.
Neutral
Sepia
Creates sepia tone images.
B/W
Creates black and white images.
●
●
B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
You can customize camera operation so that the B and A
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid
Green, and Vivid Red to produce intense yet
natural-looking colors resembling images on
positive film.
adjustment screen is accessed simply by turning the [
] or
Positive Film
[
●
●
One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 7
mireds on a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Color
temperature unit representing color temperature conversion filter
density)
Accessories
Lighter Skin Tone
Darker Skin Tone
Lightens skin tones.
Darkens skin tones.
Appendix
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky,
ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid.
► [ 6] tab ► [WB Correction].
Vivid Blue
Index
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains,
foliage, and other green subjects more vivid.
Vivid Green
Vivid Red
●
You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2.
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red
subjects more vivid.
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and
Custom Color
83
Before Use
Shooting Range and Focusing
●
●
With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone
may change. These settings may not produce the expected
results with some skin tones.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Still Images
Movies
Custom Color
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For
Camera Basics
Still Images
Movies
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Once the setting is complete, [ ] is
displayed.
Access the setting screen.
1
choose [ ], and then press the [
button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an item, and then adjust
the setting by turning the [ ] dial.
]
To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
z For stronger/more intense effects (or
darker skin tones), adjust the value to
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to
the left.
●
You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching [ ], and then touching it again.
Accessories
z Press the [ ] button to complete the
Appendix
setting.
Index
●
You can also specify a value by touching or dragging the bar.
84
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Before Use
●
●
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
cannot be changed.
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the
(
Camera Basics
●
●
●
To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to
stabilize it.
Choose [ ].
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button, choose [
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
] (either
You can enlarge or hide the magnified display area by adjusting
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
To deactivate automatic focus fine-tuning when the shutter button
z [
] and the MF indicator are displayed.
[Safety MF] ► [Off].
Specify the general focal position.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Referring to the on-screen MF indicator
(1, which shows the distance and focal
position) and the magnified display, turn
the [ ] dial to specify the general focal
position, and then press the [ ] button.
●
●
You can move the focusing frame by dragging on the screen in
step 2.
You can lock the focus during movie recording by touching [ ].
[
] is then displayed.
( )
1
z To adjust the magnification, press the [
button.
]
z During magnified display, you can move
the focusing frame by pressing the [
button and then the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
]
Accessories
Fine-tune the focus.
3
Appendix
z Press the shutter button halfway to have
the camera fine-tune the focal position
(Safety MF).
Index
z To cancel manual focus, choose [ ] in
step 1.
85
Configure the setting.
2
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Before Use
z Press the [ ] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [ ] dial.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
Access the setting screen.
1
Camera Basics
●
●
z Press the [
] button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [ 4] tab,
choose [Peaking], and then choose [On]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
●
You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
] button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode”
Configure the setting.
2
(
z Choose a menu item to configure, and
●
●
Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specified in [
]
(
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
for the final shot.
●
Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
●
You can also configure this setting by touching or dragging the
bar on the screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching
Still Images
Movies
[
].
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the
first one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther
and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your
specified focus can be set in three levels.
Accessories
Choose [ ].
1
Appendix
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Bracketing] on the [ 4] tab, and then
Index
86
1-point AF
Digital Tele-Converter
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
The camera focuses using a single AF frame. Effective for reliable
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
●
A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
Camera Basics
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ 3] tab, and then
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
in a corner, first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
z The view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
●
The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter
lever all the way toward [
] for maximum telephoto, and when
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following
Choosing the AF Method
Still Images
Movies
Change the auto focus (AF) mode to suit shooting conditions.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [
] in
Accessories
the menu, and choose the desired option
(
Appendix
Index
●
► [ 3] tab ► [AF method].
87
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF)
Before Use
●
●
●
●
You can also access the screen in step 1 by pressing the [
button.
]
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can also return the AF frame to the original position in the
center by holding down the [ ] button.
You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF
method to [1-point AF].
(
Move the AF frame.
1
You can also configure the AF frame size by pressing the [
]
z Touch the screen. An AF frame is
displayed in orange where you touched
(Touch AF).
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Turn the [ ] or [
] dial to move the
+Tracking
AF frame, and press the [ ][ ][ ][
buttons to fine-tune the position.
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Still Images
Movies
z To return the AF frame to the original
position in the center, press the [
button.
● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
]
●
After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed around
the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main subject, and
up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected faces.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Resize the AF frame.
2
z To reduce the AF frame size, turn the
] ring. Turn it again to restore it to the
● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
[
original size.
● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
Finish the setup process.
3
z Press the [ ] button.
●
When no faces are detected, or when only gray frames are displayed
(without a white frame), pressing the shutter button halfway will
display green frames in the areas in focus. Note that the maximum
●
AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital
Accessories
●
●
Appendix
frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press the
shutter button halfway.
Index
Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden
The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
●
●
88
Shooting with Servo AF
Changing the Focus Setting
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
Configure the setting.
Camera Basics
1
z Press the [
[Continuous AF] on the [ 3] tab, and
] button, choose
z Press the [ ] button and turn the [
dial to choose [SERVO].
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Focus.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press the
shutter button halfway.
On
Off
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.
In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the
specified AF method.
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus
constantly.
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
●
●
If optimum exposure cannot be obtained, the shutter speed and
aperture value are displayed in orange. Release the shutter
button, and then press it halfway again.
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a specific person’s face to focus on.
Accessories
●
●
●
AF lock shooting is not available.
Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
1
Appendix
Index
●
●
To have the camera keep adjusting the focus during continuous
[1-point AF].
► [ 3] tab ► [AF operation].
89
Enter Face Select mode.
2
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)
Before Use
z Aim the camera at the person’s face and
press the [ ] button.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can shoot after choosing a person’s face or another subject to focus on.
z After [Face Select : On] is displayed, a
face frame [ ] is displayed around the
face detected as the main subject.
Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
1
z Even if the subject moves, the face frame
Camera Basics
[
] follows the subject within a certain
Choose a person’s face or another
subject to focus on.
2
range.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z If a face is not detected, [ ] is not
displayed.
z Touch the subject or person on the
screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose the face to focus on.
3
z When the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [ ] is displayed. Focus is
maintained even if the subject moves.
z To switch the face frame [ ] to another
detected face, press the [ ] button.
z To cancel Touch AF, touch [ ].
z Once you cycle through all detected
faces, [Face Select : Off] is displayed,
followed by the selected AF method
screen.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shoot.
3
Shoot.
4
z Press the shutter button halfway. After
the camera focuses, [ ] changes to a
green [ ].
z Press the shutter button halfway. After the
camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ].
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
Accessories
Appendix
●
When [Face ID] is set to [On], only the name of the registered
person chosen as the main subject is displayed, even if other
registered people have been detected. However, their names will
Index
90
Before Use
Flash
●
If you prefer the camera not to shoot when you touch the screen,
make sure [Touch Shutter] mode is deactivated. Press the
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
] button, choose [Touch Shutter] on the [
2] tab, and
Changing the Flash Mode
●
●
●
Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between
subjects and the background.
Still Images
Movies
You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
Camera Basics
revert to [ ] mode if you touch the screen to specify where to
focus.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Lift the flash.
1
2
If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not be displayed when
registered people are detected, but the names will be recorded in
Configure the setting.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ] button, choose a flash
mode (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [
button.
the subject chosen to focus on is the same as a person detected
with Face ID.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z The option you configured is now
displayed.
Shooting with the AF Lock
Still Images
Movies
●
●
The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button
when the flash is lowered. Lift the flash in advance.
If the flash fires, vignetting may occur.
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your finger from the shutter button.
Lock the focus.
1
z With the shutter button pressed halfway,
Auto
Accessories
press the [ ] button.
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
z The focus is now locked, and [
] and
the MF indicator are displayed.
Appendix
On
z
To unlock the focus, hold the shutter
button halfway down and press the [
button again.
]
Index
Fires for each shot.
Compose the shot and shoot.
2
●
91
Slow Synchro
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Before Use
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
flash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
●
In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
z Raise the flash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [
] dial to choose
Camera Basics
the compensation level, and then press
the [ ] button.
●
In [ ] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z The correction level you specified is now
displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Off
●
When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value for flash shots to
reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
For shooting without the flash.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,
mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still.
choosing [ 5] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Safety FE] ► [Off].
You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by
●
●
Control] ► [Flash Exp. Comp].
●
You can also configure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching the desired option, and then touching it again.
as follows (except when an optional external flash is mounted).
- Press and hold the [ ] button for at least one second.
- When the flash is up, press the [ ] button and immediately
press the [
] button.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
92
Shooting with the FE Lock
Changing the Flash Timing
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
shots.
Change the timing of the flash and shutter release as follows.
Access the setting screen.
1
Raise the flash and set it to [ ]
1
z Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
Camera Basics
Lock the flash exposure.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2
Configure the setting.
2
z Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
z Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
] button.
z The flash fires, and when [ ] is displayed,
the flash output level is retained.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z To unlock FE, release the shutter button
and press the [ ] button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
1st-
curtain
The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens.
The flash fires immediately before the shutter closes.
2nd-
curtain
Compose the shot and shoot.
3
z After one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
●
FE: Flash Exposure
Accessories
Appendix
Index
93
Capturing in RAW Format
Before Use
Other Settings
The camera can capture images in JPEG and RAW format.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Processed in the camera for optimal image quality
and compressed to reduce file size. However, the
compression process is irreversible, and images
Changing Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
JPEG Images
cannot be restored to their original, unprocessed
Choose from 8 combinations of size (number of pixels) and compression
(image quality). Also specify whether to capture images in RAW format
state. Image processing may also cause some loss of
image quality.
Camera Basics
(
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
“Raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially
no loss of image quality from the camera’s image
processing. The data cannot be used in this state for
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
RAW Images
viewing on a computer or printing. You must first use
convert images to ordinary JPEG or TIFF files. Images
can be adjusted with minimal loss of image quality.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[
●
[
] and [ ] indicate different levels of image quality depending
z To capture in RAW format only, choose
the [ ] option.
on the extent of compression. At the same size (number of
pixels), [ ] offers higher image quality. Although [ ] images
have slightly lower image quality, more fit on a memory card.
z To capture images in both JPEG and
RAW format simultaneously, choose the
JPEG image quality, and then press the
[
] button. A [ ] mark is displayed next
to [RAW]. To undo this setting, follow the
same steps and remove the [ ] mark
next to [RAW].
Accessories
Appendix
●
●
When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
Index
94
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Before Use
●
●
For details on the relationship between the number of recording
Still Images
You can keep image stabilization off until the moment you shoot.
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
The file extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for
RAW images is .CR2.
Only].
Camera Basics
Using the Menu
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Image quality] on the [ 1] tab, and then
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To capture in RAW format at the same
time, turn the [
] under [RAW]. Note that only JPEG
images are captured when [−] is selected.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
] dial and choose
[
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
]
dial to choose [JPEG], and then choose
the image size and quality. Note that only
RAW images are captured when [−] is
selected.
z When finished, press the [ ] button to
return to the menu screen.
●
[RAW] and [JPEG] cannot both be set to [−].
Accessories
Appendix
Index
95
Before Use
Specific Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
Camera Basics
Enter [ ] mode.
1
z Set the mode dial to [
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Set the shutter speed.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Turn the [
speed.
] dial to set the shutter
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and
customize the camera for your shooting style
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Shutter Speed (Sec.)
30 – 1.3
[AUTO], [125] – [3200]
1 – 1/2000
[AUTO], [125] – [12800]
●
In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the
respective mode.
Accessories
●
●
When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set
Orange display of the aperture value when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
Appendix
Index
●
[
]: Time value
96
Before Use
Specific Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ([M] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
Still Images
Movies
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
Camera Basics
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Camera”
Enter [
] mode.
1
z Set the mode dial to [
].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Enter [ ] mode.
1
Set the aperture value.
2
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Turn the [
] dial to set the aperture
value.
Configure the setting.
2
z Turn the [
] dial to set the shutter
speed (1).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Turn the [ ] ring to set the aperture value
(2).
●
Orange display of the shutter speed when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).
z When the ISO speed is fixed, an
exposure level mark (4) based on
your specified values is shown on the
exposure level indicator for comparison
to the standard exposure level (3). The
exposure level mark is shown as [ ] or
( ) ( )
1
2
( )
3
●
●
[
]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the
diaphragm in the lens)
In [ ] and [ ] modes, press the [
( )
4
[
] when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
Accessories
] button and set
z The ISO speed is determined and screen
brightness changes when you press
the shutter button halfway after setting
the ISO speed to [AUTO]. If standard
exposure cannot be obtained with your
specified shutter speed and aperture
value, the ISO speed is displayed in
orange.
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed and aperture value
when there are exposure problems, so that you can shoot at the
optimum exposure.
Appendix
Index
However, safety shift is disabled when the flash fires.
97
Before Use
Shutter Speed (Sec.)
[BULB], 30 – 1.3
1 – 1/2000
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb)
[AUTO], [125] – [3200]
[AUTO], [125] – [12800]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
With bulb exposures, shots are exposed for as long as you hold down the
shutter button.
Specify bulb exposure.
1
●
●
After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
Screen brightness may change depending on your specified
shutter speed and aperture value. However, screen brightness
remains the same when the flash is up and the mode is set to [ ].
z Set the shutter speed to [BULB], following
steps 1 – 3 in “Specific Shutter Speeds
and Aperture Values ([ ] Mode)”
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
Shoot.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
[
]: Manual
z Shots are exposed for as long as you
hold the shutter button all the way down.
The elapsed exposure time is displayed
during exposure.
Calculation of optimum exposure is based on the specified
●
The following operations are available when ISO speed is set to
[AUTO].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
- Adjust exposure by turning the exposure compensation dial.
- Press the [ ] button to lock the ISO speed. Screen brightness
changes accordingly.
●
●
Maximum continuous shooting time with this feature is 4 min.
16 sec.
Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still and prevent camera shake. In this case, also disable image
●
●
To avoid camera shake that may otherwise occur when pressing
Accessories
Appendix
When [Touch Shutter] is set to [Enable], shooting is started by
touching the screen once and stopped by touching it again. Be
careful not to move the camera when touching the screen.
Index
98
Before Use
Adjusting the Flash Output
Recording Movies at Specific Shutter
Speeds and Aperture Values
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose from the three flash levels in [
][
][ ] modes.
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed, exposure, aperture value, and ISO
speed.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Camera”
Specify the flash mode.
1
z Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
Camera Basics
(
(
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Flash Mode], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
]
Enter [ ] mode.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Manual], and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
Configure the setting.
Configure the settings.
2
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Raise the flash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose
the flash level, and then press the [
button.
z Turn the [
speed.
] dial to set the shutter
]
z Turn the [ ] ring to set the aperture
value.
z Once the setting is complete, the flash
output level is displayed.
Shoot.
3
[
]: Minimum, [
]: Medium, [
]:
z Press the movie button.
Maximum
z You can also adjust settings while
recording, as described in step 2.
Accessories
●
●
and choosing [ 5] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Flash Output].
Appendix
●
Some shutter speeds may cause flickering on the screen when
recording under fluorescent or LED lighting, which may be
recorded.
follows.
- Press and hold the [ ] button for at least one second.
- When the flash is up, press the [ ] button and immediately
Index
press the [
] button.
99
Before Use
Customizing Controls and Display
●
●
In [AUTO] mode, you can also adjust the exposure before
recording by turning the exposure compensation dial.
When the ISO speed is fixed, an exposure level mark based on
your specified value is shown on the exposure level indicator for
comparison to the standard exposure level. The exposure level
mark is shown as [ ] or [ ] when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Customizing Display Information
Customize what screen is displayed when you press the [
on the shooting screen. You can also customize what information is
displayed.
] button
Camera Basics
●
●
You can check the ISO speed in [AUTO] mode by pressing the
shutter button halfway. If standard exposure cannot be obtained
with your specified shutter speed and aperture value, the ISO
speed is displayed in orange.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the setting screen.
1
z On the [ 1] tab, choose [Screen info/
toggle settings] or [VF info/ toggle
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
settings] in [Shooting information display],
Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [ ] (to
switch it to [
]) and then pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Configure the setting.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose any screen you prefer not
to display, and then press the [ ] button
to remove the [ ] mark. Pressing the
[
] button again will add the [ ] mark,
which indicates that it is selected for
display.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Accessories
●
●
An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown
at left for reference.
Appendix
At least one option must be selected.
Index
100
Customizing the Information Displayed
Assigning Functions to Controls
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Reassign functions of the shutter button, [ ] button, [ ] ring, [
dial, or [ ] dial, or assign common functions to the movie button or [
button.
]
[Custom display 1] or [Custom display 2],
and then press the [ ] button.
]
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose information to display, and
then press the [ ] button to add a [
mark.
]
Access the setting screen.
Camera Basics
1
]
z Press the [
] button, choose
Auto Mode /
[Function Assignment] on the [ 2] tab,
Hybrid Auto Mode
z To see an example of display, press the
] button to return to the [Screen
info/ toggle settings] or [VF info/ toggle
settings] screen.
[
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Configure the setting.
2
●
For a smaller grid pattern, access [ 1] tab ► [Shooting
information display] ► [Grid display].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
][ ] dials to choose the dial or
button to assign, and then press the [
button.
[
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
]
]
z When assigning the shutter button, [
]
button, [ ] ring, [
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose the shooting mode or the
] dial, or [ ] dial,
camera control, press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose the shooting mode or function,
and then press the [
] button.
Accessories
z When assigning the [ ] or [ ] button,
press the [ ] button, choose the function
on the screen displayed (either press
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the
Appendix
[
][ ] dials), and then press the [
]
Index
button.
101
Before Use
Set to [AE/AF, no AE lock] to enable focusing
by pressing the [ ] button. Note that this
disables the normal [ ] button function of
locking AE. Also note that with Touch Shutter,
the camera will not adjust the focus before
shooting.
Customizing the Quick Set Menu
Shutter button or [
button
]
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
The display of Quick Set menu items can be customized.
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
By assigning [
/
], in [ ] mode you can
[
] ring, [
] dial,
Camera Basics
set the shutter speed with the [
] dial and
or [ ] dial
the aperture value with the [ ] ring.
Access the setting screen.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Movie button
z Press the [
] button, choose [Quick
Press the button to activate the assigned
function.
setting menu layout] on the [ 2] tab,
[
] button
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
●
To restore the default settings to the movie button and [
button, choose [ ] and [ ].
]
Choose icons to include in the
menu.
2
Icons labeled with [ ] indicate that the function is not available in
the current shooting mode or under current function conditions.
With [ ] or [ ], each press of the assigned button records
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Touch icons to include in the Quick Set
menu. Selected icons are marked with
a [ ].
changes to [ ] or [ ].
z Selected items (labeled with a [ ]) will
be included in display.
●
●
With [
], each press of the button that it is assigned to adjusts
] is displayed on the screen.
and locks the focus, and [
With [ ], pressing the button that it is assigned to deactivates
screen display. To restore the display, do any of the following.
- Press any button other than the ON/OFF button
- Hold the camera in another orientation
z Items without a [ ] can be configured on
the [ ] tab of the menu screen.
Accessories
Complete the setting.
3
- Open or close the screen
z Press the [
touch [OK].
] button, and then
- Raise or lower the flash
Appendix
●
You can still record movies in [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode even
if you assign a function to the movie button.
Index
●
●
Up to 11 items can be displayed in the menu.
The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the
[
] button when the Quick Set menu is displayed.
102
Rearranging Menu Items
Before Use
Saving Shooting Settings
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the setting screen.
1
Save commonly used shooting modes and your configured function
z On the screen in step 2 of “Choosing
press the [ ] button.
settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode
dial to [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch
shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be
retained this way.
Camera Basics
z Drag an icon to move it to a new position.
Complete the setting.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2
Settings That Can Be Saved
z Press the [
] button.
● Shooting modes ([ ], [
● Items set in [ ], [ ], [
], [
], and [ ])
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Shooting menu settings
● Zoom positions
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Enter a shooting mode with settings
you want to save, and change the
settings as desired.
1
Configure the setting.
2
z Press the [
] button, choose [Save
Accessories
Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
Appendix
Index
103
Save the settings.
Configure the setting.
3
2
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Select items], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
]
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a menu item to save (max.
six items) and then press the [ ] button
to save it.
Camera Basics
●
●
To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ],
change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These setting
details are not applied in other shooting modes.
z [ ] is displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z To cancel saving, press the [ ] button.
[
] is no longer displayed.
z Press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
To clear information you have saved to [ ] and restore default
values, turn the mode dial to [ ] and choose [Reset All]
Rearrange menu items, as needed.
3
(
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Sort], and then press the
] button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[
z Choose a menu item to move (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
]
Still Images
Movies
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to change the order, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
You can save up to six commonly used shooting menu items on the [ 1]
tab. By customizing the [ 1] tab, you can access these items quickly
from a single screen.
z Press the [
] button.
Accessories
Access the setting screen.
●
●
Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specified, but they may
not be available in some shooting modes.
1
z Press the [
] button, choose [My
Appendix
Menu settings] on the [ 1] tab, and then
To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the
Index
[
] button in Shooting mode, set [Set default view] to [Yes].
●
●
On the [Select items] screen for saving or clearing items, you can
also touch items to select them.
On the [Sort] screen, you can also drag items to change the
display order.
104
Before Use
Viewing
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
Enter Playback mode.
1
Camera Basics
z Press the [
] button.
z Your last shot is displayed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Playback Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose images.
2
z To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit
them in many ways
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[
] dial clockwise.
● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [
button to enter Playback mode.
]
z Press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
●
It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
z To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [ ] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
Accessories
z To return to single-image display, press
Appendix
the [ ] button.
z To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [ ][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
Index
105
Touch-Screen Operations
Before Use
z Movies are identified by a [
To play movies, go to step 3.
] icon.
z To view the next image, drag left across
the screen, and to view the previous
image, drag right.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Play movies.
Camera Basics
3
z To start playback, press the [ ] button to
access the movie control panel, press the
z To access Scroll Display mode, quickly
drag left or right repeatedly.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[
][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then
z You can also browse through images in
Scroll Display mode by dragging left or
right.
press the [ ] button again.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Adjust the volume.
4
z Touching the central image will restore
single-image display.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
volume.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z To browse images grouped by shooting
date in Scroll Display mode, quickly drag
up or down.
z To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons.
z To start movie playback, touch [ ] in
( )
1
Pause playback.
5
z To adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
z To pause or resume playback, press the
] button.
[
z After the movie is finished, [
displayed.
] is
z To stop playback, touch the screen. The
screen shown at left is displayed, and the
following operations are available.
Accessories
●
●
●
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
Appendix
z Touch [ ] to display the volume panel,
and then touch [ ][ ] to adjust the
volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
5]
Index
tab ► [Scroll Display] ► [Off].
To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
z To switch frames, touch the scrollbar or
drag left or right.
5] tab ► [Resume] ►
[Last shot].
z To resume playback, touch [ ].
●
To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
(
31) and choose your desired effect on the [
5] tab ►
z Touch [
] to return to the screen in
[Transition Effect].
106
Switching Display Modes
Before Use
●
Switching display modes is not possible while the camera is
connected via Wi-Fi to devices other than printers.
Still Images
] button to view other information on the screen, or
to hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Press the [
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will deactivate
the viewfinder. Similarly, close the screen (facing the camera body) to
Still Images
Movies
Movies
Camera Basics
Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Histogram
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Still Images
No Information Display
z The graph in detailed information display
(
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the degree
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how
much of the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a
way to check exposure.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Simple Information Display
Detailed Information Display
z The histogram can also be accessed
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display
Accessories
Still Images
Movies
z The RGB histogram shows the
Appendix
distribution of shades of red, green, and
blue in an image. The horizontal axis
represents R, G, or B brightness, and the
vertical axis, how much of the image is
at that level of brightness. Viewing this
histogram enables you to check image
color characteristics.
Index
RGB Histogram, GPS Information
Display
107
Play the movie.
2
Before Use
z Using a smartphone connected to the
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images
on the camera, adding information such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation
z Select a movie and press the [ ] button
to play it.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
(
in the GPS information display.
z Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
Camera Basics
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
[---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
Still Images
Movies
day of still image shooting as follows.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time
Choose an image.
1
z Still images shot in [ ] mode are
labeled with [ ] icon.
GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Choose a still image labeled with [
and press the [ ] button.
]
●
You can also switch between the RGB histogram (still images
only) and GPS information display by dragging the lower half of
the screen upward or downward in detailed information display.
Play the digest movie.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
z The movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
Viewing Short Movies Recorded in Creative
Shot Mode (Creative Shot Movies)
Accessories
Appendix
Still Images
Movies
●
After a moment, [
] will no longer be displayed when you are
Play back Creative Shot movies recorded in [
Index
Choose a movie.
1
z Press the [
] button and choose
[Play Creative Shot Movies] on the [
2]
108
Viewing by Date
Before Use
Browsing and Filtering Images
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the [
Play Digest Movies] on the [
] button, choose [List/
2] tab,
Navigating through Images in an Index
Still Images
Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images
you are looking for.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Display images in an index.
1
Checking People Detected in Face ID
z Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Still Images
Movies
will be displayed.
z To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [ ]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [
] button several
times until simple information display
is activated, and then press the [ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an
image.
Choose an image.
2
]
z Turn the [ ] dial to scroll through the
images.
z Names will be displayed on detected
people.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image.
z An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
●
If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using
Accessories
3] tab ► [Face ID Info]
z Press the [ ] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
► [Name Display] ► [Off].
Appendix
●
To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the
Index
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial rapidly), choose MENU
(
5] tab ► [Index Effect] ► [Off].
109
Choose the first condition.
1
Touch-Screen Operations
Before Use
z In single-image display, press the [
]
z Pinch in to switch from single-image
display to index display.
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
choose a condition.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z To view more thumbnails per screen,
pinch in again.
z When [ ] or [ ] is selected, you can
view only images matching this condition
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial. To perform an action for all
of these images together, press the [
button and go to step 3.
z Drag up or down on the screen to scroll
through displayed images.
Camera Basics
]
z To view fewer thumbnails per screen,
spread your fingers apart.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Touch an image to choose it, and touch it
again to view it in single-image display.
Choose the second condition and
view the filtered images.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z When you have selected [ ] or [ ] as
the first condition, choose the second
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
turn the [ ] dial to view only matching
images.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions
Still Images
Movies
z To switch to filtered image display, press
the [ ] button and go to step 3.
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering
image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect
z When you have selected [ ] as the first
condition, press the [ ] button, and
press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the
next screen to choose a person.
(
Favorites
Displays the images shot on a specific date.
Displays images with detected faces.
Shot Date
People
View the filtered images.
3
Accessories
z Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons, or
turn the [ ] dial.
Still image/
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in [
]
Appendix
Movie
Name
Index
z To cancel filtered display, press the [
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
then press the [ ] button again.
]
●
When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
110
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images
Before Use
●
●
To hide or view other information, press the [
step 3.
] button in
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Options for viewing the images found (in step 3) include
Use the front dial to find and jump between desired images quickly by
filtering image display according to your specified conditions.
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
Jump to Favorites
Jumps to the first image in each group of
images that were shot on the same date.
Camera Basics
Jump Shot Date
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Single image
Jumps by 1 image at a time.
Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jumps by 100 images at a time.
●
Jump 10 Images
Jump 100 Images
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
found are no longer shown.
Choose a condition.
●
●
You can also choose conditions by touching the screens in
steps 1 and 2.
1
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Choose a condition (or jump method) in
single-image display by turning the [
dial and immediately pressing the [ ][
buttons.
After choosing conditions, you can view images matching your
conditions by touching a condition again.
]
]
View images matching your specified
condition, or jump by the specified
amount.
2
z Turn the [
] dial to view only images
Accessories
matching the condition or jump by the
specified number of images forward or
back.
Appendix
Touch-Screen Operations
Index
z You can also jump to the previous or next
image according to your jump method
chosen in step 1 of “Using the Front Dial
dragging left or right with two fingers.
111
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Before Use
●
During group playback (step 3), you can browse through images
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
actions to all images in the group at once by choosing [Protect All
are grouped, and only the first image is displayed. However, you can also
view the images individually.
Camera Basics
Choose a grouped image.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image labeled with
]
5] tab ► [Group
ungrouped during individual playback.
[
].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
In [
] mode, the simultaneous display after step 2 in “Applying
immediately after you shoot.
Choose [ ].
2
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[
View images in the group
individually.
3
z Pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
] dial will display only images in the
group.
[
Accessories
z To cancel group playback, press the [
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
]
Appendix
Index
112
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with.
4
Before Use
Editing Face ID Information
z Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it
or erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
Camera Basics
●
●
You can also access the [Edit ID Info] screen by touching an
image on the screen in step 2, touching [
] to display the
Changing Names
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
orange frame, and then touching the face to overwrite its name.
You can also choose editing options by touching them in step 3.
Access the setting screen.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [
] button and choose
Erasing Names
[Face ID Info] on the [
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
z On the screen displayed in step 3 in
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[Erase] and press the [ ] button.
Choose an image.
2
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
]
choose an image and press the [
button.
]
z An orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
Accessories
displayed in an image, press the [ ][
]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
name to change, and then press the [
button.
]
Appendix
Index
Choose the editing option.
3
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Overwrite], and
then press the [ ] button.
113
Touch-Screen Operations
Before Use
Image Viewing Options
z Spread your fingers apart (pinch out) to
zoom in.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Magnifying Images
z You can magnify images up to about 10x
by repeating this action.
Still Images
Movies
z To move the display position, drag across
the screen.
Camera Basics
Magnify an image.
1
z Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image. You
can magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Pinch in to zoom out.
z Touch [
display.
] to restore single-image
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z The approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
z To zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [ ]. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Viewing Slideshows
Still Images
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
Movies
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
2
( )
1
z To move the display position, press the
z Press the [
] button, and then
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
choose [Slideshow] on the [
1] tab
(
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Start], and then press the
] button.
z To switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the [ ] dial.
]
Accessories
[
●
●
You can return to single-image display from magnified display by
pressing the [ ] button.
You can check the focus when [
z The slideshow will start after [Loading
Appendix
] is displayed by pressing
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
the [ ] button to show the position in focus (Focus Check).
When multiple positions are in focus, press the [ ] button
repeatedly to switch to other positions.
z Press the [
slideshow.
] button to stop the
Index
●
during slideshows.
114
Before Use
Protecting Images
●
●
To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fast-
rewind, hold the [ ][ ] buttons down.
●
You can configure slideshow repetition, display time per image,
and the transition between images on the screen accessed by
z Press the [ ] button, choose [
the menu, and then choose [
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial). [ ] is displayed.
] in
] (either
]
Camera Basics
z To cancel protection, choose [OFF]. [
is no longer displayed.
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, first cancel protection.
Using the Menu
Access the setting screen.
1
z Press the [
] button and choose
Accessories
[Protect] on the [
Appendix
Index
Choose a selection method.
2
z To return to the menu screen, press the
] button.
[
115
Choosing Images Individually
Selecting a Range
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [Select].
Choose [Select Range].
1
1
press the [ ] button.
and press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
Choose an image.
Choose a starting image.
2
2
Auto Mode /
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
z Press the [ ] button.
Hybrid Auto Mode
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Protect the image.
3
z Press the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Choose an ending image.
3
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
[
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [ ] button.
●
Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3.
Accessories
Appendix
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
●
●
You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in
step 2, and you can access the confirmation screen by touching
Index
[
].
z Images before the first image cannot be
selected as the last image.
You can also protect images by touching [OK] on the screen in
step 3.
116
Protect the images.
4
Clearing All Protection at Once
Before Use
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
●
●
You can also choose the first or last image by turning the [ ] dial
when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.
To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in
step 4.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
You can also display the screen for choosing the first or last
image by touching an image on the top screen in steps 2 or 3.
You can also protect images by touching [Protect] on the screen
in step 4.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Protecting All Images at Once
Choose [Protect All Images].
1
Images] and press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Protect the images.
2
Appendix
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
]
Index
[
117
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
Before Use
Erasing Images
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
Choosing a Selection Method
Camera Basics
Choose an image to erase.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
]
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [
choose [Erase] on the [
] button, and then
1] tab
Erase the image.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
z Press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
Choose a selection method.
2
choose [Erase], and then press the [
button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a selection method, and
then press the [ ] button.
]
z The current image is now erased.
z To cancel erasure, press the [ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
]
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
●
For images captured in both RAW and JPEG format, pressing the
[
] button while the image is displayed gives you the option of
choosing [Erase ], [Erase ], or [Erase ].
Accessories
Appendix
●
●
You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
Index
118
Choosing Images Individually
Selecting a Range
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [Select].
Choose [Select Range].
1
1
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
Choose an image.
Choose images.
2
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Erase the images.
3
z To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Erase the images.
3
z Press the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
Specifying All Images at Once
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
Choose [Select All Images].
1
[
●
Choosing an image captured in both RAW and JPEG format will
erase both versions.
[Select All Images] and press the [
button.
]
Accessories
Appendix
Erase the images.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
]
Index
[
119
Rotate the image.
2
Before Use
Rotating Images
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an image.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [ ] button.
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
Choose [ ].
1
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
Camera Basics
[
●
On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [
] to rotate
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
images or touch [ ] to return to the menu screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Rotate the image.
2
Deactivating Auto Rotation
z Press the [ ] or [ ] button, depending
on the desired direction. Each time you
press the button, the image is rotated
90°. Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [
Rotate] on the [
] button, choose [Auto
5] tab, and then
●
Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(
Using the Menu
●
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
Accessories
Choose [Rotate].
1
Appendix
z Press the [
] button and choose
[Rotate] on the [
Index
120
Complete the setting.
3
Before Use
Tagging Images as Favorites
z Press the [
] button. A confirmation
message is displayed.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to
all of those images.
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
[
Camera Basics
●
●
Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in
step 3.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
Tagging images as favorites makes it easier to add them when
z To untag the image, repeat this process
and choose [OFF], and then press the
[
] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
You can also select or clear current images by touching the
screen in step 2.
Images can also be tagged as favorites by using Touch Actions
Using the Menu
(
Choose [Favorites].
1
z Press the [
] button and choose
[Favorites] on the [
Accessories
Appendix
Choose an image.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
]
Index
z To untag the image, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
121
Assign a function to a Touch Action.
2
Before Use
Convenient Control: Touch Actions
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose a dragging pattern, and
then press the [ ] button.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you have assigned to
four touch gestures (Touch Actions), in single-image display.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a function to assign.
]
Using Touch Actions Functions
Camera Basics
Assignable Functions
z Drag across the screen as shown.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Slideshow
Erase
Start a slideshow.
Erase an image.
z The function assigned to [ ] is now
activated.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Protect
Rotate
Protect an image or cancel protection.
Rotate an image.
Favorites
Tag images as favorites, or untag the image.
z Similarly, you can also activate functions
assigned to [ ], [ ], and [ ] by
dragging across the screen.
Switch to displaying the next image tagged as
a favorite.
Next Favorite
Previous Favorite
Next Date
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Switch to displaying the previous image tagged
as a favorite.
z Customize functions assigned to Touch
Actions as desired.
Switch to displaying the first image with the next
shooting date.
Switch to displaying the first image with the
previous shooting date.
Previous Date
Changing Touch Actions Functions
To Camera
Simplify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging
patterns to them as desired.
Accessories
To Smartphone
To Computer
To Printer
Access the Wi-Fi connection screen.
For Wi-Fi details, see “Wi-Fi Functions”
Appendix
(
Access the setting screen.
1
z Press the [
] button, and then
To Web Service
Index
choose [Set Touch Actions] on the [
6]
122
Review the new image.
3
Before Use
Editing Still Images
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
] button.
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
●
z The saved image is now displayed.
memory card has sufficient free space.
Camera Basics
●
●
Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
●
●
●
You can access editing screens for various functions by touching
an image after choosing the function in the menu.
of [ ].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
RAW images cannot be edited.
When [
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
[
When [
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels.
[
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
You can also view saved images by touching [Yes] on the screen
in step 3.
Resizing Images
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Still Images
Movies
Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels.
Using the Menu
Choose an image size.
1
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
Choose [Resize].
1
the menu, and choose an image size
(
z Press the [
] button and choose
[Resize] on the [
z Press the [ ] button.
Accessories
Choose an image.
2
Save the new image.
2
Appendix
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
z After [Save new image?] is displayed,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Index
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
z The image is now saved as a new file.
[
Choose an image size.
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose the size, and then press
the [ ] button.
123
Save as a new image and review.
Save as a new image and review.
4
4
Before Use
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
z Press the [
press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
] button and follow
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(
Cropping
●
Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
Camera Basics
Still Images
Movies
●
●
●
RAW images cannot be edited.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Cropped images cannot be cropped again.
Cropped images cannot be resized.
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file.
Access the setting screen.
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then press the [ ] button
●
●
●
Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than
uncropped images.
(
While previewing the cropped image in step 3, you can resize,
move, and adjust the aspect ratio of the cropping frame.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Resize, move, and adjust the aspect
ratio of the cropping frame.
2
Operations in step 2 are also possible by pressing the [
button, choosing [ 3] tab ► [Cropping], pressing the [
button, choosing an image, and pressing the [ ] button again.
]
]
z To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
●
z To move the frame, press the
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To change the frame orientation, turn the
] dial to choose [ ], and then press
[
●
●
You can also move the cropping frame in step 2 by dragging it.
the [ ] button.
Accessories
screen.
z To change the frame aspect ratio, turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ]. To switch
between aspect ratios ([ ], [
Operations are also possible by touching [ ], [ ], [
] on the top of the screen in step 2.
], and
Appendix
[
],
[
], and [ ]), press the [ ] button
repeatedly.
Index
Preview the cropped image.
3
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ].
z To switch display between the cropped
image and the cropping frame, press the
[
] button repeatedly.
124
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Before Use
●
●
The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a
You can also configure this setting by touching an option to select
it on the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
Choose [My Colors].
Camera Basics
1
z Press the [
choose [My Colors] on the [
] button, and then
3] tab
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
Still Images
Movies
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the
image as a separate file.
Choose an image.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose [i-Contrast].
Choose an option.
1
3
z Press the [
] button, and then
3] tab
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
choose [i-Contrast] on the [
(
Choose an image.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Save as a new image and review.
4
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
Accessories
z Press the [
Choose an option.
] button and follow
Appendix
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
Index
●
●
Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be
a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the
desired color.
Colors of RAW images cannot be edited.
125
Save as a new image and review.
Correct the image.
4
3
Before Use
z Press the [ ] button.
z Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the [
] button and follow
z Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
●
For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
images to appear grainy.
Camera Basics
●
●
Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
RAW images cannot be edited this way.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Save as a new image and review.
4
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting
images using [Low], [Medium], or [High].
z The image is now saved as a new file.
z Press the [
] button and follow
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
You can also configure this setting by touching [ ][ ] on the
screen in step 3.
●
●
Some images may not be corrected accurately.
To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
Correcting Red-Eye
●
●
●
Protected images cannot be overwritten.
Still Images
Movies
RAW images cannot be edited this way.
Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images also captured
in RAW format, but the original image cannot be overwritten.
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate file.
Accessories
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
1
Appendix
●
You can also save images by touching [New File] or [Overwrite]
on the screen in step 4.
z Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the
[
Index
Choose an image.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an image.
126
Save the edited movie.
4
Before Use
Editing Movies
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of movies.
Choose [ ].
1
z Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
Camera Basics
(
]
button.
z The movie is now saved as a new file.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
( )
1
Specify portions to cut.
2
z (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
●
●
The following movies cannot be edited this way: digest movies
(
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [
or [ ].
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
erased.
z To specify a portion to cut (indicated by
[
]), press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to move the orange [ ] or
[ ] icon. Cut the beginning of the movie
(from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the
end of the movie by choosing [ ].
●
●
●
If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
( )
2
Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
z If you move [ ] or [ ] to a position other
than a [ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before
the nearest [ ] mark on the left will be
cut, while in [ ] the portion after the
When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack
or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
Accessories
nearest [ ] mark on the right will be cut.
Appendix
●
You can also edit movies by touching the movie editing panel or
editing bar.
Review the edited movie.
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
], and then press the [ ] button. The
Index
[
edited movie is now played.
z To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
z To cancel editing, press the [
button, choose [OK] (either press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
]
[
127
Reducing File Sizes
Erasing Movie Chapters
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Movie file sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z On the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [ ]. Choose [New File],
and then press the [ ] button.
cannot be recovered.
z Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the [ ] button.
Select the clip to erase.
Camera Basics
1
z Play a short movie as described in
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Image Quality of Compressed Movies
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Before Compression
,
After Compression
to access the movie control panel.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then press
the [ ] button to choose a clip.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
,
Choose [ ].
2
●
●
[
][
] movies cannot be compressed.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [
button.
]
●
Compressing movies to [
] or [
] reduces the file
size while maintaining the same image quality.
z The selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
Accessories
Confirm erasure.
3
Appendix
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
Index
[
z The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
●
[
] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
128
Choose an image.
1
Before Use
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)
z Choose an image in single-image display.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Themes available in step 3 will vary
depending on image shooting date and
Face ID information.
You can choose themes such as a date or person’s name to create an
album of automatically selected images that match the theme. These
images are combined into a slideshow that can be saved as a short movie
of about 2 – 3 minutes.
Before using this feature, make sure the battery pack is fully charged.
Creating albums also requires free space on the memory card. As a
guideline, use a memory card with a capacity of 16 GB or higher, and
ensure at least 1 GB of free space.
Access the home screen.
Camera Basics
2
z Press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z After [Busy] is displayed, the home
screen is displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Preview an album.
3
Choosing Themes for Albums
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
person or [Date] or [Event] as the album
theme, and then press the [ ] button.
Press the [ ] button to access the home screen and choose the theme
for the camera to use when selecting album elements. Note that the
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z After [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, the album is played.
albums.
Creates an album of images shot on the same day.
Date
Images are selected from those shot on the same day as
the image displayed before you access the home screen.
Save the album.
4
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Save Album as Movie], and then press
the [ ] button.
Can be used to create monthly albums of people, such as
albums of children as they grow up.
Subjects whose Face ID information you registered before
shooting may be selected for albums.
Images selected are those that have the same subject shot
during the same month as the image displayed before you
access the home screen.
Person’s
name
z Once the album is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
Accessories
5
Appendix
A good choice for albums of vacations, parties, or other
events.
Index
Event
Images are selected from those shot during the event
before and after the image displayed before you access
the home screen.
Includes images based on your specified images, dates, or
people registered in Face ID.
Custom
129
Before Use
z The screen at left is displayed when
you use a new or recently formatted
memory card. Choose [OK] (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
press the [ ] button, and wait about four
minutes until the seven types of music
are registered to the card.
●
Albums can include following images captured by the camera.
- Still images
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z When using a memory card with music
already registered to it, go to step 2.
Camera Basics
●
●
●
Albums cannot be saved unless there is enough space on the
memory card.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
To jump to the next chapter during the preview, drag left, and to
jump to the previous chapter, drag right.
Create the album.
2
You can specify the color effect in step 4 by choosing [Change
Color Effect] and pressing the [ ] button. To preview how the
album looks with your selected effect applied, choose [Preview
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
album.
Album Again] on the screen in step 4 after pressing the [ ][
buttons to choose a color effect and pressing the [ ] button.
To play saved albums, choose [List of Albums] on the Story
]
Configure background music
settings.
3
●
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Highlights home screen, press the [ ] button, choose a listed
album, and press the [ ] button again.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose the desired item, press the
] button, and then press the [ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an
]
[
]
Adding Background Music to Albums
Save the album.
Still Images
Movies
4
Choose from seven kinds of background music to play during album playback.
Accessories
Register background music to a
1
memory card.
●
●
Once albums are saved, background music cannot be added later.
Background music in albums cannot be removed or changed.
Chapters of albums with background music cannot be edited
Appendix
[Music Settings] and press the [ ] button.
(
Index
130
Choose background music.
4
Before Use
●
●
●
If you prefer not to add background music, set [Add BGM] to [No]
on the screen in step 3.
z When the screen at left is displayed,
choose [Music Settings]. Add background
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
To use only background music instead of movie audio, set [Audio
Mixer] to [BGM only] on the screen in step 3.
To listen to a sample of the background music selected in [Track],
and then press the [
] button.
choose [Sample BGM] on the screen in step 3 and press the [
button.
]
Choose a color effect.
Camera Basics
5
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Creating Your Own Albums
choose [Change Color Effect].
Still Images
Create your own albums by choosing desired images.
Movies
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
color effect, and then press the [
button.
]
Choose to create a Custom album.
1
Save the album.
6
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[Custom] and press the [ ] button.
Choose a selection method.
2
●
You can specify up to 40 files (or 10 movie files) after choosing
[Image Selection]. The second time you create a custom album,
[Select images based on previous settings?] is displayed. To
use previously selected images as the basis, choose [Yes]. The
previous stills, clips, or Creative Shot movies are labeled with
z Choose [Image Selection], [Date
Selection], or [Person Selection], and
then press the [ ] button.
[
], and multiple images are displayed.
●
●
Up to 15 dates can be selected if you choose [Date Selection].
The color effect may not be applied to some images.
Accessories
Choose album elements.
3
z Once you select the elements for your
album and press the [ ] button, your
selected elements are labeled with [ ].
Appendix
Index
z Press the [
] button after you
are finished selecting still images, short
clips, or Creative Shot movies in [Image
Selection], dates in [Date Selection], or
people in [Person Selection].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Preview], and then press
the [ ] button.
]
131
Save the movie.
4
Before Use
Combining Short Clips
z Choose [Save], and then press the [
]
button.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Once the movie is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
Combine short clips to create a longer movie.
Note that movies created this way are not included in Story Highlights
Play the movie.
5
Camera Basics
Access the editing screen.
1
z Choose [Play Back
screen in step 1 to view a list of movies
you have created.
Movie] on the
z Press the [
] button, choose [Short
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Clip Mix] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose [Merge
z Choose the movie to play and press the
] button.
[
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
To play the selected clip, move the zoom lever toward [
screen in step 2.
] on the
Specify clips to combine.
2
z Drag clips on the top of the screen left or
right, choose a clip to combine, and press
the [ ] button.
To rearrange clips, press the [ ] button on the screen in step 2,
select a clip, press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial, and then press the [ ] button again.
To apply a color effect, choose [Change Color Effect] on the
screen in step 3.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
●
●
z Your selected clip is displayed on the
bottom of the screen.
To add background music, choose [Music Settings] on the screen
z To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again.
The image quality of movies saved is [
] (for NTSC) or
z Repeat these steps to specify other clips
to combine.
[
] (for PAL).
Use a fully charged battery pack, if possible.
z After you are finished selecting clips,
Accessories
press the [
] button.
Appendix
Preview the movie.
3
z Choose [Preview] and press the [
button.
]
Index
z After [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, a preview of the combined clips
is played.
132
Before Use
Available Wi-Fi Features
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
● Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi
functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a
smartphone or tablet.
Camera Basics
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Computer
Wi-Fi Functions
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
Wi-Fi.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety
of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web
services
● Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to
send camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera
can also be sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
● Printers
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP) to print them.
● Another Camera
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi-compatible Canon cameras.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
133
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible
Smartphone
Before Use
Sending Images to a Smartphone
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and send
images.
Use an Android (OS version 4.0 or later) smartphone’s NFC to simplify the
process of installing Camera Connect and connecting to the camera.
Operation when devices are initially connected via NFC varies depending
on the camera mode when the devices are touched together.
Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0
or later) against the camera to connect the devices.
Camera Basics
● If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images on the image selection
screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot remotely
Simply press the [ ] button to connect the devices. This simplifies
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
smartphone can be assigned to the [ ] button.
devices, which are listed in the Wi-Fi menu.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● If the camera is in Playback mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images from the index display
shown for image selection. The connection is ended automatically
after image transfer.
Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection
to a camera that is off or in Shooting mode.
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting
Mode
●
Canon Wi-Fi-compatible camera owners who use CameraWindow
to connect their camera via Wi-Fi to a smartphone should
consider switching to the Camera Connect mobile app.
Install Camera Connect.
1
z Activate NFC on the smartphone and
touch the devices’ N-Marks ( ) together
to start Google Play on the smartphone
automatically. Once the Camera Connect
download page is displayed, download
and install the app.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
134
Establish the connection.
Send an image.
2
4
Before Use
z Make sure the camera is off or in
Shooting mode.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [
button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
]
z Touch the N-Mark ( ) on the smartphone
with Camera Connect installed against
the camera’s N-Mark.
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
z The camera starts up automatically.
Camera Basics
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z To end the connection, press the [
button, choose [OK] on the confirmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [
button. You can also use the smartphone
to end the connection.
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
]
z Camera Connect is started on the
smartphone.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z The devices are connected automatically.
●
When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This
may damage the devices.
Adjust the privacy setting.
3
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions. If connection is not
established, keep the devices together until the camera screen
is updated.
z When this screen is displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [
button.
]
- If you attempt connection when the camera is off, a message
may be displayed on the smartphone reminding you to turn on
the camera. If so, turn the camera on and touch the devices
together again.
z You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
Accessories
Appendix
- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
Index
●
●
All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 3.
Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
135
Before Use
●
●
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
●
If during connection a message on the camera requests you to
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
●
●
Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark ( ). For
details, refer to the smartphone user manual.
●
●
The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect
to via NFC in Playback mode.
You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
Camera Basics
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [NFC] ► [Off].
Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the
Button
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode
Once you have connected to a smartphone initially by pressing the [ ]
button, you can simply press the [ ] button after that to connect again for
viewing and saving camera images on your connected device.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [
] button to turn the camera
on.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
z Touch the smartphone with Camera
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Install Camera Connect.
1
camera’s N-Mark ( ).
z For an iPhone or iPad, find Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [
button. [ ] is displayed.
]
z For Android smartphones, find Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
z To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
Press the [ ] button.
2
Accessories
z After you finish choosing images, press
the [
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ] button.
] button, choose [OK], and
Appendix
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
Index
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
z The images are now sent. The
connection is ended automatically after
the image is sent.
136
Choose [ ].
Import images.
3
7
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [
button.
]
z Use the smartphone to import images
from the camera to the smartphone.
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z
Use the smartphone to end the connection;
the camera will automatically turn off.
z The camera’s SSID is displayed.
●
●
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
For better security, you can display a password on the screen
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Password] ► [On]. In this case, in the
password field on the smartphone in step 4, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Connect the smartphone to the
network.
4
●
One smartphone can be registered to the [ ] button. To assign
4] tab ► [Mobile Device Connect Button].
z In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
[
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu
Start Camera Connect.
5
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
z Start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
Install Camera Connect.
1
z After the camera recognizes the
smartphone, a device selection screen is
displayed.
z For an iPhone or iPad, find Camera
Accessories
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
Choose the smartphone to connect to.
Appendix
6
z For Android smartphones, find Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
z Choose the smartphone (either by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or by turning
the [ ] dial), and then press the [
button.
Index
]
z After a connection is established with
the smartphone, the smartphone name
is displayed on the camera. (This screen
will close in about one minute.)
137
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
Send an image.
2
6
Before Use
z Press the [
] button.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [
button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Press the [ ] button.
]
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
Choose [ ].
3
Camera Basics
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [
button.
]
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z To end the connection, press the [
button, choose [OK] on the confirmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose [Add a Device].
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [
button. You can also use the smartphone
to end the connection.
]
4
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z To add multiple smartphones, repeat the
above procedure starting from step 1.
●
●
All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 5. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 5.
z The camera’s SSID is displayed.
z Choose the smartphone to connect to,
Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
Accessories
Adjust the privacy setting.
5
●
●
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
Appendix
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
] button.
]
Index
[
z You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●
●
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
138
Configure the privacy settings and
send images.
5
Using Another Access Point
Before Use
When connecting the camera to a smartphone with the [ ] button or
through the Wi-Fi menu, you can also use an existing access point.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Prepare for the connection.
1
settings and send images.
z Access the [Waiting to connect] screen
Camera Basics
Previous Access Points
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
To reconnect to a previous access point automatically, follow step 3 in
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
2
3
● To reconnect to a previous access point, follow the procedure from
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose [Switch Network].
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Switch Network], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
z A list of detected access points will be
displayed.
Connect to the access point and
choose the smartphone.
4
Accessories
z For WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point and
Appendix
choose the smartphone as described in
steps 5 – 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Index
z For non-WPS access points, follow
to the access point and choose the
smartphone.
139
z Choose your country or region, and
then follow the instructions displayed to
prepare for downloading.
Before Use
Saving Images to a Computer
Preparing to Register a Computer
Checking Your Computer Environment
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z The compressed software is now
downloaded to your computer.
Begin the installation.
2
Camera Basics
z Double-click the downloaded file, and
when the screen at left is displayed, click
[Easy Installation]. Follow the on-screen
instructions to complete the installation
process.
The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following
operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility
information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon
website.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Installation may take some time,
depending on computer performance and
the Internet connection.
● Windows 8/8.1
● Windows 7 SP1
● Mac OS X 10.9
z Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
● Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later
after installation.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
●
●
Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
For details, check the following website.
To uninstall the software, follow these steps.
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730
- Windows: Select [Start] menu ► [All Programs] ► [Canon
Utilities], and then choose the software for uninstallation.
- Mac OS: In the [Canon Utilities] folder within the [Applications]
folder, drag the folder of the software for uninstallation to the
Trash, and then empty the Trash.
Accessories
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.
Appendix
Download the software.
1
Index
z Visit the following site from a computer
connected to the Internet.
http://www.canon.com/icpd/
140
Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Before Use
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
On a computer running Windows, configure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
Confirming Access Point Compatibility
Confirm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
1
Confirm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
Camera Basics
z For instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS,
non-WPS access points, check the following information.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Configure the setting.
● Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
2
z Click in the following order: [Start] menu
► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ►
[CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z In the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and configure the
setting.
● Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
●
The following Windows settings are configured when you run the
utility in step 2.
- Turn on media streaming.
● Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
This will enable the camera to see (find) the computer to access
via Wi-Fi.
Accessories
- Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to see (find) the camera.
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
Appendix
●
●
If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
Index
●
Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
141
Choose [ ].
3
Before Use
●
●
For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
●
This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access
points”.
Choose [Add a Device].
4
Camera Basics
If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
]
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
► [ 4] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Check MAC Address].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
Choose [WPS Connection].
5
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [WPS Connection], and
then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Confirm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
1
Choose [PBC Method].
6
z For instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [PBC Method], and then
press the [ ] button.
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
2
Accessories
z Press the [
] button.
Establish the connection.
z Press the [ ] button.
7
Appendix
z On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
Index
z On the camera, press the [ ] button to
go to the next step.
z The camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
142
Choose the target device.
Import images.
8
11
Before Use
z Choose the target device name (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
]
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
z Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete.
Install a driver (first Windows
connection only).
9
Camera Basics
z Use Digital Photo Professional to view
images you save to a computer. To view
movies, use preinstalled or commonly
available software compatible with
movies recorded by the camera.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z When this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
z Double-click the connected camera icon.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z
Driver installation will begin.
z After driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
[Off].
●
●
●
You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
Display CameraWindow.
10
z Windows: Access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
Accessories
Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
Appendix
z Mac OS: CameraWindow is automatically
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is
established between the camera and
computer.
●
●
To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed
on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.
Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.
Index
143
Connecting to Listed Access Points
Before Use
●
●
To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If no access points are detected even after you choose [Refresh]
in step 2 to update the list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2
to complete access point settings manually. Follow on-screen
instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.
When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the
password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and press
the [ ] button.
View the listed access points.
1
z View the listed networks (access points)
●
Camera Basics
Choose an access point.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a network (access point),
and then press the [ ] button.
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
Enter the access point password.
3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
● To connect to a device via an access point, confirm that the target
device is already connected to the access point, and then follow the
(
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
] button.
]
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow
[
Choose [Auto].
4
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the
] button.
]
Accessories
[
Appendix
z To save images to a connected computer,
follow the procedure from step 8 in
Index
144
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Before Use
Sending Images to a Registered Web
Service
Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. Note
that you will need to enter an email address used on your computer or
smartphone to receive a notification message for completing linkage
settings.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Registering Web Services
Camera Basics
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that
you want to use.
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
1
z Press the [
] button to turn the camera
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
on.
z Press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, touch [OK].
● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.
com/cig/).
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● You must have an account with Web services other than CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check
the websites for each Web service you want to register.
Choose [
].
2
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [
press the [ ] button.
● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
], and then
●
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY also provides user guides for
downloading.
Accessories
Accept the agreement to enter an
email address.
3
Appendix
z Read the agreement displayed and touch
[I Agree].
Index
145
Establish a connection with an
access point.
Access the page in the notification
message and complete camera link
settings.
4
8
Before Use
z Connect to the access point as described
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z From a computer or smartphone,
access the page linked in the notification
message.
z Follow the instructions to complete the
settings on the camera link settings page.
Camera Basics
Enter your email address.
5
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Complete CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
settings on the camera.
z Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, a
screen is displayed for entering an email
address.
9
z Touch [ ].
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations.
z Enter your email address and touch
[Next].
z You can add other Web services,
as needed. In this case, follow the
Enter a four-digit number.
6
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Enter a four-digit number of your choice
and touch [Next].
z You will need this four-digit number later
when setting up linkage with CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY in step 8.
●
Make sure initially that your computer or smartphone mail
application is not configured to block email from relevant domains,
which may prevent you from receiving the notification message.
Check for the notification message.
7
z Once information has been sent to
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you will
receive a notification message at the
email address entered in step 5.
Accessories
●
●
You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
Appendix
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the menu. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and then
configure the setting.
z Touch [OK] on the next screen, which
indicates that notification has been sent.
Index
z [
] now changes to [
].
●
Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
146
Registering Other Web Services
Uploading Images to Web Services
Before Use
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
1
z Press the [
] button to turn the camera
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
1
on.
and access the camera link settings
page.
z Press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
z From a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Choose the destination.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Touch the icon of the Web service to
connect to.
Configure the Web service you want
to use.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2
z If multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, touch the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen displayed.
z Follow the instructions displayed on the
smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Send an image.
3
Choose [
].
3
z Drag images left or right to choose an
image to send, and then touch [Send this
image].
z In Playback mode, press the [ ] button.
z Drag left or right on the screen, and then
z When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, and touch [I Agree].
touch [
].
z The Web service settings are now
updated.
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
Accessories
●
If any configured settings change, follow these steps again to
update the camera settings.
z After the image is sent, touch [OK] on the
screen displayed to return to the playback
screen.
Appendix
Index
147
Before Use
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
●
●
●
Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
To view images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on a
smartphone, try the dedicated Canon Online Photo Album app.
Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for
iPhones or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from
Google Play.
Camera Basics
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose [ ].
2
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose [Add a Device].
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
Accessories
z The camera’s SSID is displayed.
Appendix
Index
148
Connect the printer to the network.
4
Before Use
Sending Images to Another Camera
z In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu, choose
the SSID (network name) displayed on the
camera to establish a connection.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as
follows.
● Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be
connected to wirelessly. You cannot connect to a Canon-brand camera
that does not have a Wi-Fi function, even if it supports Eye-Fi cards.
Choose the printer.
5
z Choose the printer name (either press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
[
Camera Basics
then press the [ ] button.
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
Choose an image to print.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
6
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
]
Choose [ ].
2
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Print], and then press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z For detailed printing instructions, see
Choose [Add a Device].
3
z To end the connection, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] on the confirmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
[
] button.
z Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
Accessories
too.
●
●
Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
z Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
Appendix
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
Index
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●
●
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
149
Send an image.
4
Before Use
Image Sending Options
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [
button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
recording pixel setting (size) before sending. Some Web services also
enable you to annotate the images you send.
]
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
Sending Multiple Images
Camera Basics
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose [Select and send].
1
z To end the connection, press the
z On the image transfer screen, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
confirmation screen (either press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Select and
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
send], and then press the [ ] button.
[
then press the [ ] button.
Choose a selection method.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
2
●
●
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose a selection method.
]
[
][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting.
●
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
Choosing Images Individually
(
[Off].
Accessories
●
●
You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
Choose [Select].
1
Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Appendix
(
press the [ ] button.
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
Index
150
Choose an image.
Choose images.
2
2
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
an image to send, and then press the [
button. [ ] is displayed.
]
(
z To include movies, press the
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Incl.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z To cancel selection, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
[
Movies], and then press the [ ] button to
mark the option as selected ( ).
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
Camera Basics
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
z After you finish choosing images, press
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
the [
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
] button.
Send the images.
3
]
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
] button.
]
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
[
Send the images.
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
] button.
]
Sending Favorite Images
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[
Choose [Favorite Images].
1
●
You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom
lever twice toward [ ] to access single-image display and then
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images] and press the [ ] button.
z An image selection screen for favorites is
displayed. If you prefer not to include an
image, choose the image and press the
Selecting a Range
Accessories
[
] button to remove [ ].
z After you finish choosing images, press
the [ ] button, choose [OK], and
Choose [Select Range].
1
Appendix
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
then press the [ ] button.
Index
Range] and press the [ ] button.
Send the images.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
] button.
]
[
151
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels
(Image Size)
Before Use
●
In step 1, [Favorite Images] is not available unless you have
tagged images as favorites.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][
]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the recording pixel setting (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
Notes on Sending Images
● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
Camera Basics
● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
● Choosing [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected size
before sending.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send.
● Movies cannot be resized.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
compressed file is sent instead of the original file. Note that this may
delay transmission, and the file cannot be sent unless there is enough
space for it on the memory card.
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Resize for Sending].
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send
to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of
characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the
Web service.
● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
Access the screen for adding
comments.
1
z On the image transfer screen, choose
Accessories
[
] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
Appendix
2
3
Index
Send the image.
●
●
When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
152
Assign [ ] to the [ ] button (only
when sending images by pressing
the [ ] button).
3
Before Use
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Clear the [ ] button setting if a
smartphone is already assigned to the
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
z Press the [ ] button to access the mobile
connection screen, choose [ ] (either
Camera Basics
Initial Preparations
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Preparing the Camera
Preparing the Computer
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Register [ ] as the destination. You can also assign [ ] to the [ ] button,
so that you can simply press the [ ] button to send any unsent images on
the memory card to a computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Install and configure the software on the destination computer.
Install the software.
1
Add [ ] as a destination.
z Install the software on a computer
1
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Add [ ] as a destination, as described in
Register the camera.
2
z Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
z To include a Web service as the
destination, log in to CANON iMAGE
z Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [ ], and
then click [Add new camera].
model, access the Web service settings
screen, and choose the destination
Web service in Image Sync settings.
For details, refer to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY Help.
z A list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent.
Accessories
Appendix
z Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [ ].
Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
2
Index
z Press the [
] button and choose
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].
]
153
Sending Images
Before Use
●
●
Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so
the computer must be connected to the Internet.
Camera Basics
Send images.
1
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z If you have already assigned [ ] to the
[ ] button, press the [ ] button.
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone
z If you have not assigned the button
this way, choose [ ] as described in
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
By installing the Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) app, you can
use your smartphone to view and download images sent via Image Sync
while they are stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
server.
z Sent images are labeled with a [ ] icon.
In preparation, enable smartphone access as follows.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Save the images to the computer.
2
z Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
● Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for iPhones
or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from Google Play.
z Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
model, access the Web service settings screen, and enable viewing
and downloading from a smartphone in the Image Sync settings. For
details, refer to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help.
Accessories
●
When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery
●
●
Once images stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server have been deleted, they can no longer be
viewed.
pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
Appendix
Images you sent before enabling smartphone viewing and
downloading in Image Sync settings cannot be accessed this way.
Index
●
For Canon Online Photo Album instructions, refer to Canon
Online Photo Album Help.
154
Shooting Remotely
Before Use
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to
shoot remotely.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera
Connect.
Choose a shooting mode.
1
z Turn the mode dial to choose [ ], [
],
● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
Camera Basics
[
], [ ], or [ ] as the mode.
Secure the camera.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2
z Once remote shooting begins, the
●
Privacy settings must be configured in advance to allow image
camera lens will come out. Lens motion
from zooming may also move the camera
out of position. Keep the camera still by
mounting it on a tripod or taking other
measures.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Geotagging Images on the Camera
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Connect the camera and
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated Camera
Connect application can be added to images on the camera. Images are
tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
3
z In the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
●
Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home
time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and
Choose remote shooting.
4
z In Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose remote shooting.
to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones.
Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
z The camera lens will come out. Keep
your fingers away from the lens, and
make sure no objects will obstruct it.
●
Accessories
z Once the camera is ready for remote
shooting, a live image from the camera
will be displayed on the smartphone.
Appendix
Index
z At this time, a message is displayed
on the camera, and all operations
except pressing the ON/OFF button are
disabled.
Shoot.
5
z Use the smartphone to shoot.
155
Before Use
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
●
●
[
[
] mode is used for shooting in modes other than [ ], [
], [ ], and [ ]. However, some Quick Set and MENU
],
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
settings you have configured in advance may be changed
automatically.
Movie shooting is not available.
Editing Connection Information
Camera Basics
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
a device to edit.
1
●
●
Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and import images from the camera.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ] button.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the icon of a
device to edit, and then press the [
button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose [Edit a Device].
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
]
]
Choose the device to edit.
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
Accessories
dial to choose the device to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Choose the item to edit.
4
Index
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose the item to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
z The items you can change depend on the
device or service.
156
Changing the Camera Nickname
Before Use
Connection
Configurable Items
Web
Services
Change the camera nickname (displayed on connected devices) as
desired.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[Change Device Nickname]
–
O
O
O
O
Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
1
(
z Press the [
] button and choose
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
Camera Basics
O
O
O
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
–
O
: Configurable
: Not configurable
Choose [Change Device Nickname].
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing a Device Nickname
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
] dial to choose [Change Device
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
[
Nickname], and then press the [
button.
]
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Device Nickname] and press the [
button.
]
Change the nickname.
3
z Select the input field and press the [
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
]
z Press the [ ] button to access the
nickname.
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
Accessories
●
●
A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different
nickname.
Appendix
You can also change the nickname from the [Device Nickname]
screen displayed when you first use Wi-Fi. In this case, select the
text box, press the [ ] button to access the keyboard, and then
enter a new nickname.
Connection Info] and press the [
button.
]
Index
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
[
choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
]
z The connection information will be
erased.
157
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Before Use
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be
sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
1
Camera Basics
z Press the [
] button and choose
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choose [Reset Settings].
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Restore the default settings.
3
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
]
[
z The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
Accessories
●
To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose
Appendix
Index
158
Before Use
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
configured. Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater
convenience.
Date-Based Image Storage
Camera Basics
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Choose [Create Folder] on the [ 1] tab,
and then choose [Daily].
Setting Menu
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for
greater convenience
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns file numbers.
z Choose [File Numbering] on the [ 1] tab,
and then choose an option.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th
Continuous
Auto Reset
shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory
cards.
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch
memory cards, or when a new folder is created.
159
Low-Level Formatting
Before Use
●
Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-
level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
use an empty (or formatted,
Formatting Memory Cards
Camera Basics
z On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,
you should format the card with this camera.
] button to choose [Low Level
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back
them up.
Format]. A [ ] icon is displayed.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Follow step 2 in “Formatting Memory
formatting process.
Access the [Format] screen.
1
z Choose [Format] on the [ 1] tab, and
●
●
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
then press the [ ] button.
of the memory card.
Choose [OK].
2
You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[
] button.
z The memory card is now formatted.
Changing the Video System
Accessories
Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting
determines the image quality (frame rate) available for movies.
●
Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
Appendix
z Choose [Video system] on the [ 1] tab,
and then choose an option.
Index
●
The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
160
Electronic Level Calibration
Switching the Color of Screen Information
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Information displayed on the screen and menus can be changed to a color
suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this setting is
level the camera in advance.
z Choose [Night Display] on the [ 2] tab,
Make sure the camera is level.
1
Camera Basics
z Place the camera on a flat surface, such
as a table.
z To restore the original display, choose
[Off].
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Calibrate the electronic level.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Choose [Electronic Level] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
●
You can also return the setting to [Off] by holding down the
z To adjust left/right tilt, choose [Horizontal
Roll Calibration], and to adjust forward/
backward tilt, choose [Vertical Pitch
Calibration], followed by the [ ] button. A
confirmation message is displayed.
[
] button for at least one second on the shooting screen or
in Playback mode during single-image display.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Using Eco Mode
z Choose [OK], and then press the [
button.
]
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
Resetting the Electronic Level
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
Configure the setting.
1
Accessories
z Choose [Eco Mode] on the [ 2] tab, and
then choose [On].
z Choose [Electronic Level] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
Appendix
z [
] is now shown on the shooting
z Choose [Reset], and then press the [
]
button.
Index
z The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
z Choose [OK], and then press the [
]
button.
161
Shoot.
2
Before Use
●
For maximum brightness, press and hold the [
] button
z
To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the lens
is still out, press the shutter button halfway.
for at least one second when the shooting screen is displayed
or when in single-image display. (This will override the [Disp.
Brightness] setting on the [ 2] tab.) To restore the original
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
brightness, press and hold the [
one second or restart the camera.
] button again for at least
Power-Saving Adjustment
Camera Basics
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
World Clock
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Choose [Power Saving] on the [ 2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Choose an item, press the [ ] button,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to configure the setting.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Specify your destination.
1
●
To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
z Choose [Time Zone] on the [ 2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
]
●
●
The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power
Down] to [Off].
These power-saving functions are not available when you have
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
Accessories
z To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the
Screen Brightness
[
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial,
and then choose [ ] by pressing the
][ ] buttons.
z Press the [ ] button.
Appendix
Screen and viewfinder brightness can be set separately. Before
adjustment, make sure the display to adjust is activated.
[
Index
z Choose [Disp. Brightness] on the [ 2]
tab, press the [ ] button, and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
adjust the brightness.
162
Switch to the destination time zone.
2
Display Language
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
z [ ] is now shown on the shooting screen
]
Change the display language as needed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Choose [Language ] on the [ 3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
(
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
●
automatically update your [ Home] time and date.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [ ] button and immediately pressing
Date and Time
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
the [
] button.
Adjust the date and time as follows.
z Choose [Date/Time] on the [ 2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
Silencing Camera Operations
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
z Choose [Mute] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose [On].
Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
Accessories
the [
immediately after you press the [
[0 sec.].
] button, set the retraction timing to
●
●
Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [
button as you turn the camera on.
]
Appendix
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [ ] button or
drag up across the screen. Adjust volume as needed by pressing
the [ ][ ] buttons or by dragging up or down quickly.
z Choose [Lens Retraction] on the [ 2] tab,
and then choose [0 sec.].
Index
163
Adjusting the Volume
Hiding Hints and Tips
Before Use
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose Quick Set menu
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
(
30) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
z Choose [Volume] on the [ 3] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Hints & Tips] on the [ 3] tab,
and then choose [Off].
z Choose an item, and then press the
[
][ ] buttons to adjust the volume.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Customizing Sounds
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Adjusting the Touch-Screen Panel
Customize camera operating sounds as follows.
z Choose [Sound Options] on the [ 3] tab,
Sensitivity of the touch-screen panel can be increased to respond to a
lighter touch, or you can disable touch control.
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [ 4] tab ► [Touch Operation],
and then choose the desired option.
z Choose an item, and then press the
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[
][ ] buttons to change the sound.
z To increase touch-screen panel
sensitivity, choose [Sensitive], and to
disable touch control, choose [Disable].
●
The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [
] mode
(
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Accessories
Start-Up Screen
Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as
follows.
Appendix
z Choose [Units] on the [ 4] tab, and then
choose [ft/in].
z Choose [Start-up Image] on the [ 1] tab,
Index
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an option.
164
Deleting All Copyright Information
Checking Certification Logos
Before Use
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
time as follows.
Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Choose [Certification Logo Display] on
the [ 4] tab, and then press the [
button.
]
Info].
Camera Basics
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
Setting Copyright Information to Record in
Images
Adjusting Other Settings
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
The following settings can also be adjusted.
z Choose [Copyright Info] on the [ 4] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Enter Author’s Name] or
[Enter Copyright Details]. Press the [
button to access the keyboard, and enter
]
Restoring Default Camera Settings
]
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
Accessories
z Press the [
] button. When [Accept
changes?] is displayed, choose [Yes]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
Access the [Reset All] screen.
1
Appendix
z Choose [Reset All] on the [ 4] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
[
] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z The information set here will now be
Index
recorded in images.
Restore default settings.
2
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
z Default settings are now restored.
]
●
To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info]
on the screen above, and then press the [ ] button.
[
165
Before Use
●
The following functions are not restored to default settings.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
and [ 3] tab setting [Language
- Shooting Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
166
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
Before Use
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that any repairs your Canon product may require as a result of such
malfunction are not covered under warranty and will incur a fee.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Accessories
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon
accessories and other compatible accessories sold
separately
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
167
Before Use
System Map
Flash Units
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Included Accessories
Battery Pack
NB-13L*1
Battery Charger
Speedlite*4
600EX-RT, 600EX, 580EX II,
430EX II, 320EX, 270EX II
Neck Strap
Strap Adapter
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE*1
High-Power Flash
Camera Basics
HF-DC2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
USB Cable (camera end: Micro-B)*2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Other Accessories
Memory Card
Power
Card Reader
Computer
Remote Switch
RS-60E3
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Compact Power
Adapter
CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
Connect
Station CS100
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-DC110
PictBridge-Compatible Printers
Cables
Accessories
HDMI Cable
TV/Video
System
Appendix
(camera end: Type D)*3
Index
*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-600PCU).
*3 Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.).
*4 The following accessories are also supported: Speedlite 580EX, 430EX, 270EX,
and 220EX, Speedlite Transmitter ST-E3-RT, Speedlite Bracket SB-E2, and Off-
Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.
168
Compact Power Adapter
CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
Before Use
Optional Accessories
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that
availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
z Insert the included battery pack into the
camera for charging. Interface Cable
IFC-600PCU (sold separately) is required
to connect the adapter to the camera.
Power Supplies
Camera Basics
Flash Units
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Battery Pack NB-13L
High-Power Flash HF-DC2
z Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
z External flash for illuminating subjects
that are out of range of the built-in flash.
High-Power Flash HF-DC1 can also be
used.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
z Charger for Battery Pack NB-13L
Speedlite 600EX-RT/600EX/
580EX II/430EX II/320EX/270EX II
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
The message [Battery communication error] is displayed if you
use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is
required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages
resulting from accidents, such as malfunction or fire, that occur
due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.
z Shoe-mounted flash unit that enables
many styles of flash photography.
Speedlite 580EX, 430EX, 270EX, and
220EX are also supported.
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110
Speedlite Bracket SB-E2
z For powering the camera using
z Prevents unnatural shadows next to
subjects during vertical shooting. Includes
Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.
Accessories
household power. Recommended when
using the camera over extended periods,
or when connecting the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be used to
charge the battery pack in the camera.
Appendix
Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2/ST-E3-RT
Index
z Enables wireless control of slave
Speedlite flash units (except Speedlite
220EX/270EX).
●
●
The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with
100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
●
High-Power Flash units cannot be used in [ ], [
shooting mode when [Flash Mode] is set to [Manual].
], or [
]
169
Other Accessories
Before Use
Using Optional Accessories
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Interface Cable IFC-600PCU
Playback on a TV
z For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Still Images
Movies
You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV
with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m / 8.2 ft.,
with a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at an image
Camera Basics
Remote Switch RS-60E3
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
quality of [
], [
], [
], [
], [
], [
], or
z Enables remote shutter button operation
(pressing the button halfway or all the
way down).
[
] can be viewed in high definition.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
1
Printers
Connect the camera to the TV.
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
z On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
z Even without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
z On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
Accessories
Photo and Movie Storage
Appendix
Connect Station CS100
Index
● A media hub for storing camera images,
viewing on a connected TV, printing
wirelessly on a Wi-Fi-compatible printer,
sharing over the Internet, and more.
Turn the TV on and switch to
external input.
3
z Switch the TV input to the external input
you connected the cable to in step 2.
170
Turn the camera on.
4
Powering the Camera with Household Power
Before Use
z Press the [
] button.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
z Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110 (sold separately)
eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.
z When finished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
Make sure the camera is off.
1
Camera Basics
Open the cover.
2
●
Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
connected to a television.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
( )
2
to open the memory card/battery cover,
and then open the coupler cable port
cover as shown.
( )
1
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
●
●
Some information may not be available when using a TV as the
Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
Insert the coupler.
3
z Holding the coupler with the terminals (1)
facing as shown, insert the coupler just
as you would a battery pack (following
step 2 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot
while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot,
follow the same steps as when using the camera screen.
( )
1
available.
z Make sure the coupler cable passes
through the port (1).
Accessories
Appendix
( )
1
Index
171
Close the cover.
4
Before Use
Inserting and Charging the Battery Pack
z Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
( )
2
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Charge the battery pack by using the supplied battery pack with an
optional Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E or Interface Cable
IFC-600PCU.
( )
1
Insert the battery pack.
1
Camera Basics
z Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
to open the cover.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Connect the power cord.
5
z Insert one end of the power cord into the
compact power adapter, and then plug
the other end into a power outlet.
z Insert the battery pack as described in
step 2 of “Inserting the Battery Pack and
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z
z
Turn the camera on and use it as desired.
z Follow step 3 in “Inserting the Battery
to close the cover.
When finished, turn the camera off and
unplug the power cord from the outlet.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Connect the compact power adapter
to the camera.
2
●
●
Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while
the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the
camera.
( )
1
z With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). Hold the smaller plug of the
interface cable (sold separately) facing
as shown and insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal (2).
Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing
so could result in malfunction or damage to the product.
( )
2
Accessories
z Insert the larger plug of the interface
cable into the compact power adapter.
Appendix
Index
172
Charge the battery pack.
3
Before Use
●
●
●
●
For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
z CA-DC30: Flip out the plug (1) and plug
the compact power adapter into a power
outlet (2).
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
You can view images even while the battery is charging, by
z CA-DC30E: Plug the power cord into the
compact power adapter, then plug the
other end into a power outlet.
However, you cannot shoot while the battery is charging.
Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Charging begins and the USB charge
lamp lights up.
z The lamp turns off when charging
finishes.
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery
z Remove the compact power adapter from
the power outlet and the interface cable
from the camera.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
You can also charge the battery pack by inserting the larger plug of the
interface cable into a computer’s USB terminal in step 2 of “Inserting and
on the computer, refer to the computer user manual.
●
●
To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
●
●
Charging is not possible when the camera is off.
With some computers, battery charging may require the memory
card to be in the camera. Insert the memory card in the camera
When charging a different battery pack, be sure first to disconnect
the interface cable from the camera and then insert another
battery pack for charging.
(
19) before connecting the cable to the computer’s USB port.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
173
Speedlite EX Series
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately)
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
These optional flash units can provide bright lighting and meet a variety of
flash photography needs.
An optional Remote Switch RS-60E3 can be used to avoid camera shake
that may otherwise occur when pressing the shutter button directly. This
optional accessory is convenient when shooting at slow shutter speeds.
Attach the flash.
1
Connect the remote switch.
z Make sure the camera is off, and then
Camera Basics
1
attach the flash unit to the hot shoe.
z Make sure the camera is off.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z Open the terminal cover and insert the
remote switch plug.
Turn the flash on, and then turn the
camera on.
2
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z A red [ ] icon is now displayed.
Shoot.
2
z The flash pilot lamp will light up when the
flash is ready.
z To shoot, press the release button on the
remote switch.
Choose shooting mode [ ], [ ],
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
3
[
], or [ ].
z Flash settings can only be configured in
these modes. In other modes, the flash
is adjusted and fired automatically, as
needed.
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
More sophisticated flash photography is possible with an optional
Speedlite EX series flash. For movie shooting using an LED light, the
optional Speedlite 320EX flash is available.
Configure the external flash.
4
z Press the [
] button, choose [Flash
Accessories
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
●
●
●
This camera does not support some Speedlite EX series
functions.
Non-EX series Canon flash units may not fire correctly or may not
fire at all, in some cases.
z Options already set on the flash itself are
displayed.
Appendix
Use of non-Canon flash units (especially high-voltage flash units)
or flash accessories may prevent normal camera operation and
may damage the camera.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an item, and then set the
desired option.
]
Index
z Available items vary depending on the
shooting mode and the flash attached
●
Also refer to the Speedlite EX series manual for additional
information.
(
174
Camera Settings Available with an External Flash
(Sold Separately)
Before Use
●
Settings for the built-in flash cannot be configured while a
Speedlite EX series flash is attached, because that setting screen
is no longer accessible.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Still Images
Movies
●
●
●
You can also access the setting screen by pressing the [ ] button
for at least one second.
The following items are available in [ ], [
], [
], or [ ] mode. In
other shooting modes, only [Red-Eye Lamp] can be configured. (With
autoflash control, the flash always fires.) However, external flash units do
600EX-RT/580EX II only: [Flash Control] is not available if the
external flash has been set up for stroboscopic flash.
320EX only: Auto LED lighting is only available in low-light movie
recording or in Movie mode. In this case, the [ ] icon is shown.
Camera Basics
Shooting Mode
Item
Options
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Auto*1
Manual*2
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately)
Flash Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Still Images
Movies
Flash Exp.
Comp*3
–3 to +3
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
z Using the optional Speedlite Bracket
SB-E2 can help prevent unnatural
shadows next to subjects during vertical
shooting.
1/128*5 – 1/1
(in 1/3-stop increments)
Flash Output*4
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Wireless Func.*6
Red-Eye Lamp
Off/Optical/Radio
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
z To keep the LCD screen out of the way
of the bracket, use the screen closed and
facing outward.
On/Off
On
Safety FE*7
Off
O
O
Clear Flash Settings*8
Accessories
Appendix
Index
175
*1 E-TTL mode is used for the flash.
*2 M mode is used for the flash.
Before Use
Using the Software
In [ ] shooting mode, E-TTL mode is also available for the flash. In this case,
when the flash fires, flash exposure compensation set on the flash is applied to
the flash output level set on the camera.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
To utilize the features of the following software, download the software
from the Canon website and install it on your computer.
*3 Can be configured only when [Flash Mode] is [Auto] and flash exposure
compensation set on the flash is [+0]. When you adjust flash exposure
compensation on 600EX-RT, 600EX, 580EX II, or 430EX II Speedlites, the
camera display will be updated accordingly.
*4 Can be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Manual]. Linked to settings on the
flash unit.
*5 1/64 for Speedlite 430EX II/430EX/320EX/270EX II/270EX.
*6 Configure other options on the flash unit itself. Available with Speedlite
580EX II/600EX-RT/600EX/90EX. When this item is not set to [Off], [Shutter
Sync.] cannot be set to [2nd-curtain]. (If [Shutter Sync.] is set to [2nd-curtain], it
will be changed to [1st-curtain].)
● CameraWindow
- Import images to your computer
● Image Transfer Utility
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● Map Utility
- Use a map to view GPS information that has been added to images
● Digital Photo Professional
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
- Browse, process and edit RAW images
*7 Can only be configured when [Flash Mode] is [Auto].
*8 Restores all default settings. You can also restore defaults for [Safety FE] and
●
●
To view and edit movies on a computer, use preinstalled or
commonly available software compatible with movies recorded by
the camera.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
In [ ] shooting mode, icons representing Smiling, Sleeping,
Babies (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children shooting
scenes determined by the camera are not displayed, and the
Image Transfer Utility can also be downloaded from the Image
Sync settings page of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Computer Connections via a Cable
Accessories
Checking Your Computer Environment
Appendix
The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed
system requirements and compatibility information, including support in
new operating systems, visit the Canon website.
Index
● Windows 8/8.1
● Windows 7 SP1
● Mac OS X 10.10
● Mac OS X 10.9
176
When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system
Before Use
z Windows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
z In the screen that is displayed, click the
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Installing the Software
change program link of [
].
z Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
Camera Basics
Saving Images to a Computer
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Using a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B), you can
connect the camera to the computer and save images to the computer.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Double-click [
].
Connect the camera to the
1
computer.
z With the camera turned off, open the
cover. With the smaller plug of the cable
in the orientation shown, insert the plug
fully into the camera terminal.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Save the images to the computer.
3
z Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
z Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
z Connect the larger cable plug to the
computer. For details on computer
connections, refer to the computer user
manual.
z After images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the [
] button to
Accessories
turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.
z To view images you save to a computer,
use preinstalled or commonly available
software compatible with images
captured by the camera.
Appendix
Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
2
Index
z Press the [
] button.
z Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
177
Before Use
Printing Images
●
●
●
Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [
icon in the taskbar.
]
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
Print your shots and configure a variety of settings used for your printer
or photo printing services by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-
compatible printer with a cable.
A Canon SELPHY CP printer is used in this example of PictBridge
printing. Also refer to your printer user manual.
Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
Camera Basics
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Easy Print
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images)
may not be saved.
Still Images
Movies
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer with a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B).
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image file sizes.
Make sure the camera and printer
are off.
1
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Connect the camera to the printer.
2
z Open the terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal.
z Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Turn the printer on.
3
178
Turn the camera on.
4
Configuring Print Settings
Before Use
z Press the [
] button.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Access the printing screen.
1
Choose an image.
5
z Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image.
]
Camera Basics
Configure the settings.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Access the printing screen.
6
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose an option (either press the
]
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
press the [ ] button again.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button to return to the
printing screen.
Print the image.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
7
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
] button.
]
File No. Prints images with the file number added.
[
Prints images with both the date and file
number added.
z Printing now begins.
Both
z To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printing is finished.
–
Off
Default Matches current printer settings.
z When you are finished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
–
Off
Accessories
Uses information from the time of shooting to
print under optimal settings.
On
Appendix
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.
●
●
For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
Index
No. of
Copies
–
Choose the number of copies to print.
RAW images cannot be printed.
Cropping
Paper
Settings
Specify the paper size, layout, and other details
–
(
179
Cropping Images before Printing
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
Choose [Paper Settings].
1
z After following step 1 in “Configuring Print
Choose [Cropping].
1
z After following step 1 in “Configuring Print
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
Camera Basics
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
[
] button.
Choose a paper size.
2
z A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
2
z To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose a type of paper.
3
z To move the frame, press the
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To rotate the frame, turn the [ ] dial.
z When finished, press the [ ] button.
Print the image.
3
Choose a layout.
to print.
4
Accessories
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an option.
Appendix
●
Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
z When choosing [N-up], press the [
button. On the next screen, choose the
number of images per sheet (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
]
Index
Print the image.
5
180
Available Layout Options
Printing Movie Scenes
Before Use
Still Images
Movies
Default
Matches current printer settings.
Prints with blank space around the image.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Bordered
Access the printing screen.
1
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
z Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
178) to choose a movie. The screen
at left is displayed.
N-up
Choose how many images to print per sheet.
(
Prints images for identification purposes.
Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of L
and an aspect ratio of 3:2.
Camera Basics
ID Photo
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choose a printing method.
2
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Fixed Size
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. On the
next screen, choose an option (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial), and then press the [ ] button to
return to the printing screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Printing ID Photos
]
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Choose [ID Photo].
1
Print the image.
3
z
Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing Paper
choose [ID Photo] and press the [ ] button.
Movie Printing Options
Single
Prints the current scene as a still image.
Choose the long and short side length.
2
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single
sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, file
number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption]
to [On].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose the length (either press the
Sequence
Accessories
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Appendix
●
●
To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button again.
Choose the printing area.
3
After displaying a scene to print as described in steps 2 – 5 of
Index
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Cropping], and then press
the [ ] button.
]
here by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ] in the movie
control panel and then pressing the [ ] button.
z Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
area.
Print the image.
4
181
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Before Use
●
●
Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
[
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
memory card has print settings that were configured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
Camera Basics
●
●
●
Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
●
RAW images cannot be included in print list.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
Configuring Print Settings
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
Still Images
Movies
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
z Press the [
settings] on the [
the [ ] button.
] button, choose [Print
4] tab, and then press
Still Images
Movies
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Print Settings], and then
press the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose and configure items as needed
]
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
1
z Press the [
] button, choose [Print
4] tab, and then press
settings] on the [
the [ ] button.
(
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [Select Images & Qty.],
]
Standard
Index
One image is printed per sheet.
Accessories
Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Print Type
Appendix
Both
On
Both standard and index formats are printed.
Choose an image.
2
Images are printed with the shooting date.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Index
Date
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
–
Off
On
Images are printed with the file number.
–
File No.
z
You can now specify the number of copies.
Off
z If you specify index printing for the image,
it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To cancel
index printing for the image, press the [
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
All image print list settings are cleared after
printing.
On
Off
Clear DPOF
data
]
–
182
Specify the number of prints.
3
Clearing All Images from the Print List
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to specify the number of prints (up
to 99).
]
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
[Clear All Selections] and press the [
button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
]
z To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat
steps 2 – 3.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
Camera Basics
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
z Printing quantity cannot be specified for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
[
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
z When finished, press the [
] button
Still Images
Movies
to return to the menu screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
z When images have been added to the
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images
Movies
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],
and then simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
z Any DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
(
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Accessories
Still Images
Movies
Appendix
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
Index
[Select All Images] and press the [
button.
]
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
[
183
Choose an image.
2
Adding Images to a Photobook
Before Use
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
]
Still Images
Movies
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and using CameraWindow to import them to your
z [ ] is displayed.
z To remove the image from the photobook,
press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
is convenient when ordering printed photobooks online or printing
photobooks with your own printer.
Camera Basics
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Choosing a Selection Method
z When finished, press the [
to return to the menu screen.
] button
z Press the [
[Photobook Set-up] on the [
then choose how you will select images.
] button, choose
4] tab, and
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
[
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
[Select All Images] and press the [
button.
]
memory card has print settings that were configured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
]
[
Adding Images Individually
Accessories
Still Images
Movies
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Appendix
Choose [Select].
1
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
Index
[Clear All Selections] and press the [
button.
]
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [
]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
] button.
[
184
Before Use
Troubleshooting
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Power
Camera Basics
Nothing happens when the ON/OFF button is pressed.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
●
●
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
Appendix
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Helpful information when using the camera
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
●
Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
The lens is not retracted.
●
Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
The battery pack is swollen.
Accessories
●
Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Appendix
Display on a TV
Index
185
Subjects in shots look too dark.
Shooting
Before Use
●
●
●
Cannot shoot.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
●
●
●
●
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Camera Basics
●
Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
-
The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent
or LED lighting.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
●
●
Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
[ ] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
●
●
●
[
Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
●
Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
●
●
White spots appear in flash shots.
●
This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles.
Shots look grainy.
Shots are out of focus.
●
●
Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
●
Subjects are affected by red-eye.
●
●
●
●
●
will light up for flash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
Accessories
Appendix
Shots are blurry.
●
●
Blurring may occur more often when Touch Shutter is used to shoot, depending
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
on shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting.
Index
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
●
Shooting settings or Quick Set menu settings are not available.
●
To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter
button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
●
Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available
186
The Babies or Children icon is not displayed.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
Before Use
●
The Babies and Children icons will not be displayed if the birthday is not set in
●
●
●
Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Touch AF or Touch Shutter does not work.
●
Touch AF or Touch Shutter will not work if you touch the edges of the screen.
Touch closer to the center of the screen.
Sound is not played during movies.
Camera Basics
●
in the movie is faint.
Shooting Movies
●
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
modes.
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
●
Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Cannot access the Story Highlights home screen by pressing the [
button.
]
(
●
Home screen display is not possible when connected to a printer. Disconnect the
camera from the printer.
[
] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
●
Home screen display is not possible during Wi-Fi connections. End the Wi-Fi
connection.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
A desired subject icon for an album is not displayed on the Story
Highlights home screen.
●
-
-
-
name of the person for the album before accessing the Story Highlights home
Zooming is not possible.
●
●
Memory Card
and [
Subjects look distorted.
Accessories
The memory card is not recognized.
●
Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
●
malfunction.
Appendix
Linear noise is recorded.
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
●
Linear noise may be recorded if lights or other sources of bright light are visible
on the shooting screen in an otherwise dark scene. Recompose the shot so that
the bright light is not visible on the shooting screen or nearby.
Index
●
When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
Playback
-
Press the [
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [
] button
down as you press the [ ] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
Playback is not possible.
●
Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
files or alter the folder structure.
187
Cannot send images.
Wi-Fi
Before Use
●
●
●
The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.
RAW images cannot be sent. For images captured in both JPEG and RAW
format, only the JPEG version is sent. However, RAW images can be sent using
Image Sync.
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [ ] button.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and
try again.
●
In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during magnified display
or index display. Switch to single-image display and try again. Similarly, the
Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or filtered image display
according to specified conditions. Cancel group or filtered image playback.
The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
●
Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
move or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images sent
Camera Basics
these image files or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
●
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Cannot add a device/destination.
Cannot resize images for sending.
●
A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera first, and then add new
To add a smartphone, first install the dedicated application Camera Connect on
To add a computer, first install the software CameraWindow on your computer.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
●
Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the recording pixel setting of their
original size.
●
Movies cannot be resized.
●
●
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
●
Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce
●
●
●
Movies may take a long time to send.
●
●
Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the
2.4 GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [
is displayed.
Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the
2.4 GHz band.
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
]
●
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
No notification message is received on a computer or smartphone after
adding CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera.
●
Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
specify a supported channel manually.
Accessories
●
Make sure the email address you entered is correct, and try adding the
destination again.
Appendix
●
Check the email settings on the computer or smartphone. If they are configured to
block email from certain domains, you may not be able to receive the notification
message.
Index
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
●
188
Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
MOV/Cannot play back MP4
Before Use
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Shooting or Playback
●
Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
Cannot magnify!/Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/
Cannot assign to category/Unselectable image./No identification
information
No memory card
Camera Basics
●
The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
●
The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Memory card locked
●
The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch
(
(
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Cannot record!
Invalid selection range
●
Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
●
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Exceeded selection limit
●
If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
●
●
●
(
(
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
Insufficient space on card
●
(
(
(
Naming error!
Touch AF unavailable
●
The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [ 1] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
●
Accessories
Touch AF canceled
●
Appendix
(
Lens Error
Index
●
This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
No Image.
●
used in dusty or sandy locations.
The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
●
Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
189
A camera error was detected (error number)
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
Before Use
●
If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
●
●
You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth
devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
●
●
●
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
File Error
●
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Sending failed
Memory card error
Camera Basics
●
If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Print error
●
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Receiving failed
Insufficient space on card
●
There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufficient space.
Ink absorber full
●
Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
●
●
●
The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images
is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked
position.
A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
●
Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
●
When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Cannot determine access point
Accessories
●
The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
Insufficient space on server
●
Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
Appendix
space.
No access points found
●
●
Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Index
●
Check network settings
●
Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
●
IP address conflict
●
Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another.
190
Before Use
On-Screen Information
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Shooting (Information Display)
The same information is shown on the viewfinder.
(
)
Camera Basics
34
(
)( )( ) ( )( ) (
)
(
)
18
(
19
)
12 13 14 15 16 17
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
( )
1
(
)
)
20
(
31
)
(
21
( )
2
(39)
(
( )
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
3
(40)
(
22
)
( )
4
( )
5
( )
( )
8
6
(
) ( ) ( ) (
35 36 37 38
)
( )
7
( )
9
10
(
(
33
)
)
32
(
23
)
(
) ( ) (
39 40
)
(
)
41
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
(
)
42
( )
11
* In [ ] mode, indicates the number of shots available.
(
)
(
)
(
) (
)
(
28
)
(
29
)
(
)
24
25
26 27
30
(
43
)
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display
Details
Sufficient charge
Accessories
(3) Flash exposure compensation
Slightly depleted, but sufficient
Appendix
Nearly depleted—charge the battery
pack soon
(Blinking red)
Index
Depleted—charge the battery pack
immediately
[Charge the battery]
(
191
(33) Still images: Recording pixel
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
Before Use
(34) File size
(30) Image quality / Frame rate
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
( ) ( ) ( )
1
2
3
( ) ( )( )( )
( )( )( )(
)
(
) (
)
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11
12 13
(32) Compression (image quality)
(
14
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
15
16
17
18
(
Camera Basics
(
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(
)
(
) ( ) (
)
(
) ( )(
)
19
20 21 22
23 24 25
●
Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
(
) (
)
(
30
)
(
)
(
)
(
)
26 28
32
33
34
(
) (
)
(
)
31
27
29
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
(17) Exposure compensation level
(
(4) Current image no. / Total no. of
images
Accessories
(22) White balance correction
(
Appendix
Index
(12) Folder number - File number
(
Short clip playback effect
(
192
Summary of Movie Control Panel
Before Use
Functions and Menu Tables
The following operations are available on the movie control panel,
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Touch to display the volume panel, and then touch [ ][ ] to
adjust the volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
Icons in black, such as , indicate that the function is available or
automatically set in that shooting mode.
Gray icons, such as , indicate that the function is unavailable in that
shooting mode.
Play
Camera Basics
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][
buttons or turn the [ ] dial. No sound is played.)
]
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [
button.)
]
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Auto
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected,
125 – 12800
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
/
/
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
Accessories
ONE SHOT
●
During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
previous or next clip) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Appendix
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
SERVO
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
193
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Camera Basics
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
*3 /
/
*3 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*3 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
194
Before Use
Aperture Value
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Shutter Speed
Camera Basics
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Bulb Setting
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
4
Center
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
Periphery
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
*5 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*5 / *5 /
Appendix
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
*5 /
/
/
/
/
*5 / *5 /
/
/
/
195
Quick Set Menu
Before Use
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
+Tracking
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*6 /
/
/
*6 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
Camera Basics
1-point AF
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Image quality
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 [SERVO] when subject movement is detected.
*3 Not available, but switches to [ ] in some cases.
*4 FE lock not available in [ ] flash mode.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
When Set to NTSC
*5 Only when [
] is selected.
*6 Only available for shooting. Subject designation not available.
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
Appendix
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
196
Before Use
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
Delay*3
Camera Basics
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
When Set to PAL
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Shots*4
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*2 /
Appendix
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
197
Before Use
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*5 /
/
*5 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Camera Basics
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
7
/
/
*6 / *6 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
Index
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
198
Shooting Tab
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
[
1] Tab
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Camera Basics
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
JPEG
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*3 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*4 One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of
shots.
*5 Automatically set, matching the aspect ratio specified in [Movie rec. size].
*6 White balance is not available.
*7 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue,
and skin tone.
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
RAW
–
Appendix
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
199
Before Use
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Display priority
Power Saving
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Camera Basics
Smooth
Screen info/ toggle settings / VF info/ toggle settings
Shooting Info/Histogram/Grid display/Electronic Level
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
VF display
Normal
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
VF vertical display
On/Off
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Fast
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Grid display
Grid 1
/Grid 2
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Display 1/Display 2
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
On/Off
Appendix
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
/
/
/
200
Disable
[
2] Tab
Before Use
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Display Time
Off/Quick
On/Off
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Camera Basics
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.
Hybrid Auto Mode
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
/
/
/
/
/
[
[
[
] ring/[
] dial/[ ] dial/[ ] button/[ ] button
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Hold
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
/
] button
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Display Info
Off
] button
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Detailed
Accessories
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
/
/
/
Index
Enable
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Destination C
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
201
Before Use
Enable
On
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Disable
Off
Camera Basics
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
[
3] Tab
Standard
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
2
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Normal
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Off
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Small
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Lock
/
/
/
Accessories
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
On
1.6x/2.0x
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
202
Off
*1 /
/
/
Off
*1 /
/
/
Before Use
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
On
Peaking
On/Off
Camera Basics
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Off
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Level
Low/High
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
[
4] Tab
Color
Red/Yellow/Blue
Off
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
5x/10x
IS Mode
Off
Accessories
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Appendix
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
On
Continuous
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
203
Shoot Only
Rate of Change
Before Use
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Dynamic IS
Low
Camera Basics
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Standard
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
High
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Flash Mode
Auto
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Manual
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
[
5] Tab
/
Accessories
Flash Exp. Comp
Appendix
ISO Speed
Flash Output
Index
ISO Auto Settings
Max ISO Speed
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
204
Shutter Sync.
1st-curtain
Before Use
On/Off
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
2nd-curtain
Camera Basics
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Effect
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Red-Eye Lamp
On/Off
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Shot Interval
15 sec./30 sec./1 min.
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Safety FE
On
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Frame Rate
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
(NTSC),
/
(PAL)
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Off
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Shooting Time
60 min./90 min./120 min./Unlimited
Accessories
Appendix
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Sharp/Off/Soft
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
205
[
6] Tab
Before Use
Star Visibility
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Standard/Prominent
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Camera Basics
[
7] Tab
Low/Standard/High
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
On
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
On/Off
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Off
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Center/AF Point
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Include Stills/No Stills
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Accessories
On
Appendix
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
Off
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
206
Disable
[
8] Tab
Before Use
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Available when the AF frame is set to [1-point].
*3 [Enable] for functions other than Creative Zone and movies.
Auto
Camera Basics
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Set Up Tab
Off
Reference
Page
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tab
Item
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Create Folder
File Numbering
Format
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
On/Off
1
Video system
Display settings
Electronic Level
Start-up Image
Eco Mode
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Auto
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Power Saving
Disp. Brightness
Night Display
Time Zone
Accessories
2
Enable
Appendix
*1 /
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Date/Time
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Index
Lens Retraction
207
Reference
Page
Playback Tab
Before Use
Tab
Item
Language
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Reference
Page
Tab
Item
Mute
Protect
3
Volume
Rotate
Sound Options
Hints & Tips
Camera Basics
1
Erase
Favorites
Touch Operation
Units
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Slideshow
Album Playback
List/Play Digest Movies
Play Creative Shot Movies
Short Clip Mix
Image Search
i-Contrast
Wi-Fi Settings
Mobile Device Connect Button
Certification Logo Display
Copyright Info
Reset All
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
4
2
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Resize
My Menu Tab
Cropping
3
4
Red-Eye Correction
My Colors
Reference
Page
Tab
Item
My Menu settings
Face ID Info
Print settings
Photobook Set-up
Transition Effect
Index Effect
Scroll Display
Group Images
Auto Rotate
Resume
1
Accessories
Appendix
Index
5
Image jump with
208
Reference
Page
Before Use
Tab
Item
Handling Precautions
6
Set Touch Actions
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction
or erase image data.
Print Tab
Camera Basics
Item
Print
Reference Page
–
● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Select Images & Qty.
Select Range
● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Select All Images
Clear All Selections
Print Settings
● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to
warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic
bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it
from the bag.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To
maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for
some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until
it runs out of power before storing the battery pack.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
209
Continuous Shooting
Speed
Before Use
Specifications
(Varies depending on the subject,
zoom position, and other shooting
factors, as well as memory card
brands.) .............................................One-Shot AF:
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera
Approx. 5.9 shots/sec.
Servo AF: Approx. 4.4 shots/sec.
Image Sensor
Camera Effective Pixels
Camera Basics
Built-in Flash
(Some image processing may use
Metering Range (Wide angle end)....50 cm – 7.0 m (1.6 – 23 ft.)
Metering Range (Telephoto end)......50 cm – 4.0 m (1.6 – 13 ft.)
fewer pixels) .......................................Approx. 20.2 million pixels
Total Pixels........................................Approx. 20.9 million pixels
Image Size........................................1.0-inch type
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shutter Speed
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Auto Mode (Auto Settings)................1 – 1/2000 sec.
Other Modes Combined....................30 – 1/2000 sec., bulb supported
Lens
Focal Length
(35mm film equivalent) ..........................8.8 – 36.8 mm (24 – 100 mm)
Zoom Factor .....................................4.2x
Aperture
f/number............................................1.8 – 11 (W)
2.8 – 11 (T)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Digital Zoom
Maximum with Optical Zoom ............Approx. 17x
Focal Length
(Telephoto end, 35mm film equivalent).....Approx. 400 mm
ZoomPlus
(L size)................................................Approx. 8.4x
AF Type ................................................1-point, Face+Tracking
(AF points: up to 31)
File Format............................................Design rule for Camera File
system, DPOF (version 1.1)
compliant
Viewfinder.............................................Electronic viewfinder
Effective Pixels:
Data Type (Still Images)
Image File Format.............................Exif 2.3 (DCF 2.0)
Image Formats..................................JPEG, RAW (CR2, a Canon 14-bit
RAW format)
Approx. 2,360,000 dots
Screen Size: 0.39-type
Coverage: Approx. 100%
Eyepoint: 22 mm
Accessories
Data Type (Movies)
Appendix
Dioptric Adjustment:
Recording Format.............................MP4
Video.................................................MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio.................................................MPEG-4 AAC LC (stereo)
−3.0 to +1.0 m-1 (dpt)
Index
Screen (Monitor)
Type..................................................Color TFT LCD
Screen Size ......................................7.5 cm (3.0 in.)
Effective Pixels .................................Approx. 1,040,000 dots
Power Source
Battery Pack .....................................NB-13L
Charging via USB.............................Using Compact Power Adapter
CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
AC Adapter Kit..................................ACK-DC110
210
Interface
Wired ................................................USB (Micro-B), HDMI (Type D)
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Before Use
Wireless............................................Specifications: IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Frequency: 2.4 GHz
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Screen On
Approx. 210
Approx. 215
Number of Shots
Channels: 1 – 11
Security: WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/
TKIP), WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)
Viewfinder On
Number of Shots
(Eco Mode On)
Screen On
Approx. 320
Operating Environment
Temperatures....................................0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Camera Basics
Movie Recording
Time (Actual
Use)*1
Screen On
Approx. 40 minutes
Viewfinder On
Screen On
Approx. 40 minutes
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Dimensions (WxHxD) ...........................112.4 x 76.4 x 44.2 mm
(4.43 x 3.01 x 1.74 in.)
Movie Recording
Time (Continuous
Shooting)*2
Playback Time*3
Approx. 1 hour 10 minutes
Approx. 1 hour 10 minutes
Approx. 4 hours
Weight
Including Battery Pack,
Memory Card....................................Approx. 377 g (13.3 oz.)
Camera Only.....................................Approx. 353 g (12.5 oz.)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Viewfinder On
*1 Total time when shooting repeatedly under the following conditions:
- In [ ] mode, with all other settings set to defaults
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
- With recording, stopping, zooming, and turning the camera on and off
*2 Total time when shooting repeatedly under the following conditions:
- In [
] mode, with all other settings set to defaults
- Automatically stop/resume after the time or capacity per recording is reached
*3 Time when playing back a slideshow of still images.
Shooting Range
Maximum Wide Angle
Maximum Telephoto
Shooting
Mode
Focus
Range
Accessories
(
)
(
)
–
5 cm (2.0 in.) – infinity 40 cm (1.3 ft.) – infinity
5 cm (2.0 in.) – infinity 40 cm (1.3 ft.) – infinity
Appendix
Other
modes
Index
5 – 50 cm
(2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.)
*
–
* Not available in some shooting modes.
211
Number of Shots per Memory Card
Recording Time per Memory Card
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Recording Time
Frame Rate/
Video System
Recording Time
for Individual
Movies (Approx.)
is as follows. Note that the number of shots available varies by aspect
ratio.
Size
per 16 GB Memory
Card (Approx.)
Number of shots per 16 GB memory card (approx. shots)
(NTSC)
(PAL)
59 min. 30 sec.
29 min. 59 sec.
1786
2999
Camera Basics
,
(1920 x 1080)
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
(NTSC)
(PAL)
1 hr. 26 min. 05 sec. 29 min. 59 sec.
2857
4810
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
4 hr. 05 min. 15 sec. 29 min. 59 sec.
10 hr. 22 min. 35 sec. 1 hr.
(1280 x 720)
(640 x 480)
8377
(NTSC)
(PAL)
14724
48592
69418
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
RAW
610
● Recording times for individual movies are based on memory cards
rated at an SD speed class of 10. Recording may stop when cards
rated at lower speed classes are used. Recording will also stop
automatically when the file size reaches 4 GB, or when the card
becomes full.
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
Accessories
Appendix
Index
212
Battery Pack NB-13L
Before Use
Type:
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
3.6 V DC
1250 mAh
Approx. 300 times
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Nominal Voltage:
Nominal Capacity:
Charging Cycles:
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Camera Basics
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Rated Input:
100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.09 A (100 V) – 0.06 A (240 V)
4.2 V DC, 0.7 A
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Rated Output:
Charging Time:
Approx. 2 hr. 10 min. (when using NB-13L)
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
Rated Input:
100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.07 A (100 V) – 0.045 A (240 V)
5.0 V DC, 0.55 A
Rated Output:
Charging Time:
Approx. 5 hr.*
(when charged with NB-13L in the camera)
* Charging time varies greatly depending on the
remaining battery level.
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Accessories
● Size, weight, and number of shots available are based on
measurement guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products
Association (CIPA).
Appendix
Index
● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
213
Before Use
Index
Exposure
H
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Handheld nightscene
High dynamic range
A
Camera Basics
F
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
D
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
I
Date/time
Flash
→
Image quality Compression
B
Images
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Background defocus
→
Defaults Reset all
→
Batteries Date/time (date/time
→
Playback Viewing
battery)
Battery pack
Focusing
Servo AF 89
Accessories
J
E
Editing
Appendix
M
C
Focus range
Index
Editing or erasing connection
Camera
G
214
Menu
Movies
Software
Q
Before Use
Quick Set menu
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Saving images to
R
W
RAW 94
Camera Basics
Star nightscape
Star time-lapse movie
Image quality (recording pixels/
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Z
S
Screen
N
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
→
Neck strap Strap
→
Menu Quick Set menu, Menu
T
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
→
Memory cards
P
Toy camera effect
Sending images to
Servo AF 89
Accessories
→
Playback Viewing
Appendix
→
→
→
AC adapter kit,
Battery charger,
Battery pack
Index
V
Shooting
Program AE 77
→
Shooting date/time Date/time
215
● Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other
than as described in this guide.
Before Use
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use
- Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal
use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid
violating WLAN regulations, visit the Canon website to check where
use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
use in other countries and regions.
● Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
● Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
- Altering or modifying the product
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
- Removing the certification labels from the product
● This product may receive interference from other devices that emit
radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far
away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the
same time as this product.
● According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations,
export permission (or service transaction permission) from the
Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or
services (including this product) outside Japan.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Security Precautions
● Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported
to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
● Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that
Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss
of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.
● Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays
the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use
(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to
connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized
access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and
do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks.
Accessories
● When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and
reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
Appendix
Index
● Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this
product due to loss or theft of the product.
216
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
Trademarks and Licensing
Before Use
● Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
● Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard
to cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems).
● App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Camera Basics
● HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
● The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
● The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.
in the United States and in other countries.
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
● All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant
video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4
standard.
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS
over IP enables PictBridge connections in network
environments, and the camera is also compatible with
this standard.
Accessories
Disclaimer
Appendix
● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
● All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
Index
● Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specifications and appearance.
● Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
217
|